JP4712734B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention includes a variable display device having a plurality of variable display portions capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, and when a combination of identification information is a specific display result as a display result of variable display A game in which a special effect is executed during variable display of identification information on a variable display device when a transition is made to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player and the combination of identification information becomes a special display result as a display result of variable display Related to the machine.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, which is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device. Some are configured to be controllable to a specific gaming state.

  The specific game state means a state advantageous for a player who is given a predetermined game value. Specifically, the specific gaming state is, for example, a state in which a special variable winning device is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a ball (a big hit gaming state), or a state in which a right to become advantageous for a player has occurred. In this state, a predetermined game value such as a state where conditions for paying out premium game media are easily established is given.

  In such a gaming machine, the fact that the display result of the variable display device that displays the symbol as identification information is a combination of specific display modes (specific display result) determined in advance is generally referred to as “big hit”. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Further, when a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the V zone provided in the big prize opening) is not established at the time when the big prize opening is closed, the big hit gaming state is ended.

  In addition, if a special condition such as a display result of variable display of identification information becomes a special specific display result (special display result) of the specific display results in the variable display device, the jackpot is subsequently obtained. Some are configured to shift to a high-probability state (also referred to as a probability variation state) in which the probability of occurrence of the occurrence is high.

  In the following Patent Document 1, if the result of the big hit determination is out of place, after determining the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol (left and right symbols), different tables are obtained depending on whether or not reach is reached. A gaming machine is disclosed that uses a difference value for a specific symbol (the number of deviations relative to a first stop symbol or a second stop symbol) to determine a final stop symbol by adding the difference value to the second stop symbol. Yes. In this gaming machine, the main control unit transmits a command including information on the determined stop symbol to the display control unit, and the display control unit displays the stop symbol on the symbol display unit based on the received command.

JP 2003-164613 (paragraphs 0048-0057, 0060, FIGS. 8-10)

  By the way, in the gaming machine, a special combination called a chance item (special display result) is stopped and displayed on the variable display device, so that the player changes to a state advantageous to the player such as a small hit. In addition to the privilege to be performed, there is also a notification informing that a privilege on production such as the development of the production to super reach is included). As a chance, the symbol combination is usually a combination of symbols different from the jackpot symbol (the combination of the left, middle and right symbols being the same symbol) and the reach symbol (the combination of the left and right symbols being the same symbol). In a gaming machine that stops and displays such a chance eye, if the symbol is determined by the method described in Patent Document 1, there is a possibility that the stop symbol may become a chance even when a privilege is not given.

  Accordingly, the present invention provides a gaming machine capable of preventing the special display result from being derived and displayed when it is determined that the combination of identification information is not the special display result as the variable display display result. With the goal.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a plurality of variable display portions (for example, left, middle, and right display areas) that can variably display a plurality of types of identification information (for example, left, middle, and right decorative symbols) that can each be identified. A specific display state (for example, a variable display device 9) that is advantageous to the player when the combination of identification information results in a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) as the display result of the variable display. For example, the game is shifted to the big hit game state, and the combination of identification information as the variable display result is a special display result (for example, chance chance A, chance eye B, chance chance for sudden chance (sudden probability variation pattern), A special effect is executed during the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device when the chance (small hit symbol) is reached (for example, when the chance eyes A and B are reached, the super display is performed). When it comes to chances for sudden hits, after performing a sudden round of big odds game of 2 rounds, the production in the chance mode is performed, and when it comes to chances for small hits, 2 rounds of small hits A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes an effect in the chance mode after executing a game, and a gaming control microcomputer (for example, a gaming control microcomputer 560) that controls the progress of the game; An effect control microcomputer for controlling the display state of the variable display device (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100), and the game control microcomputer determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit) And display variable of the identification information variable display pattern (for example, variation pattern) Predetermining means to be determined in advance (for example, a part for executing steps S57, S58, S201 to S210, S211A to S211C, S212A to S212C in the game control microcomputer 560) and the determination result of the predetermining means can be specified The variation pattern command and symbol information in the ornament symbol command control processing (step S28) in the gaming control microcomputer 560 (for example, the gaming command microcomputer 560) for transmitting a predetermined command (for example, variation pattern command, symbol information designation command). The control for transmitting the designated command is executed), and the microcomputer for effect control finally reaches and displays the final stop identification information (for example, middle symbol) when it becomes reach and does not shift to the specific gaming state Non-reach Reach identification information random number (for example, reach design determining random number) for determining identification information (for example, reach symbol), different from the specific display result derived and displayed when the reach is not reached and the game is not shifted to the specific gaming state First identification information (for example, left symbol), second identification information (for example, right symbol), and third identification information (for example, medium symbol) that constitute non-specific display results (for example, out-of-reach symbols (defocused symbols) that do not become reach) A first identification information random number (for example, a left symbol determination random number), a second identification information random number (for example, a right symbol determination random number), and a third identification information random number (for example, a medium symbol determination random number) ) Numerical value update means (for example, the part of step S706 in the production control microcomputer 100) that updates the numerical value of Numerical value extraction means for extracting numerical values of the identification information random number, the first identification information random number, the second identification information random number, and the third identification information random number (for example, steps S1002, S1004, S1007, S1034, S1036 in the production control microcomputer 100) Identification information determination for determining a combination of identification information derived and displayed as a display result on a plurality of variable display units in a variable display device based on a predetermined command and a part for executing S1039, S1062, and S1071) Based on the means (for example, the part for executing steps S620, S626 and S632 in the production control microcomputer 100) and the reception of the predetermined command, the variable display device starts the variable display of the identification information, and the variable display Identifiable from pattern Variable display control means for deriving and displaying the combination of identification information determined by the identification information determination means when the variable display time (for example, fluctuation time) has elapsed (for example, the effect control process in the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S705). ) Based on the fact that the variable display control means has determined that the reach is a special reach (e.g., super reach) based on the predetermined command. After the reach identification information determined by the identification information determination means is derived and displayed, the final stop identification information constituting the specific display result in combination with the reach identification information (for example, when the reach design is “7”) The symbol “seven”) passes the component position of the specific display result (for example, the stop position of the middle symbol) (For example, as shown in Fig. 125 and Fig. 126, the middle symbol temporarily stops after one stop position, and then temporarily stops, then changes again and develops into super reach.) The identification information determining means determines whether or not to obtain the special display result based on the pre-determined command (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S659 and S1023), and the special display result is determined. Then, when it is determined, the combination of identification information derived and displayed is determined as a special display result (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S664, S666, S1027, and S1028), and is based on a predetermined command. When it is determined that the game will be reached and the game state is not changed (for example, step S 51 Y, S653 Y), reach identification information random numbers extracted in the reach identification information table (for example, the reach symbol selection table shown in FIG. 61) in which control data (for example, determination value) is assigned to the reach identification information The identification information associated with the control data that matches the numerical value of is determined as reach identification information (for example, reach symbol), and final stop identification information (for example, medium symbol based on the determined reach identification information and a predetermined command) ) (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S1063 to S1064, S1072 to S1073), and based on the pre-determined command, it is specified that the reach is not reached and the game state is not shifted to the specific game state. (For example, Y in step S651, N in S653), control data in the first identification information Corresponding to control data that matches the numerical value of the first identification information random number extracted in the allocated first identification information table (for example, the left symbol selection table shown in FIGS. 43, 49, 50, and 51). The identification information is determined as the first identification information (for example, the left symbol) (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S1003 and S1035), and is controlled to the difference between the first identification information and the second identification information. Control data that matches the numerical value of the second identification information random number extracted in the second identification information table to which data is allocated (for example, the right symbol addition value determination table shown in FIGS. 43, 49, 50, and 51). The associated difference value (for example, an addition value for the left symbol) is determined as a difference (for example, symbol difference) between the first identification information and the second identification information, and the first identification information and The second identification information (for example, the right design) is determined based on the difference between the first identification information or the second identification information and the third identification information (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S1006 and S1038). The third identification extracted in the third identification information table (for example, the medium symbol addition value determination table shown in FIGS. 44 to 48) in which the control data is allocated so that the combination of the identification information does not result in the special display result . The difference value (for example, the added value for the left symbol or the right symbol) associated with the control data that matches the numerical value of the information random number is the difference between the first identification information or the second identification information and the third identification information (for example, the symbol) difference) and determining, third identification information by the difference between the first identification information or the second identification information (e.g., to determine the middle symbol) (e.g., the effect control microphone Computer 100 is step S1008～S1012, executes S1040～S1044) that characterized.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, the identification information determining means determines whether or not to obtain a special display result based on a pre-determined command, and the identification information that is derived and displayed when it is determined to be the special display result When the combination is determined as a special display result, and it is specified that it will reach and not shift to a specific gaming state based on a pre-determined command, it will be extracted in the reach identification information table in which control data is allocated to the reach identification information. The identification information associated with the control data matching the numerical value of the reach identification information random number is determined as the reach identification information, and the final stop identification information is determined based on the determined reach identification information and the predetermined command, and is determined in advance. When it is specified that the game is not reached and the game state is not changed based on the command, the first identification information is controlled. The identification information associated with the control data matching the numerical value of the first identification information random number extracted in the first identification information table to which the data is allocated is determined as the first identification information, and the first identification information and the second The difference value associated with the control data matching the numerical value of the second identification information random number extracted in the second identification information table in which the control data is allocated to the difference from the identification information is the first identification information and the second identification information. And the second identification information is determined based on the difference from the first identification information, and the third identification in which the control data is allocated to the first identification information or the difference between the second identification information and the third identification information. The difference value associated with the control data matching the numerical value of the third identification information random number extracted in the information table is determined as the first identification information or the difference between the second identification information and the third identification information, and the identification information Combination Allowed is configured to determine a third identification information by the difference between the special display so as not result, first identification information or the second identification information. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the special display result from being derived and displayed when it is determined that the combination of the identification information is not the special display result (chance) as the variable display result. Further, since the first identification information, the second identification information, and the third identification information are determined using the first identification information random number, the second identification information random number, and the third identification information random number, respectively, the reach is not reached. Various combinations of identification information in the non-specific display result (defocused symbol) are available. Further, the variable display control means derives and displays the reach identification information determined by the identification information determination means on the basis of specifying that the reach is a special reach among the reach based on the pre-determined command. It is configured to execute a reach effect that develops into a special reach after the final stop identification information that constitutes the specific display result in combination with the identification information passes the configuration position of the specific display result, improving the interest of the game Can be made.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. In the following embodiments, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can be applied to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (excluding a game board described later). Is a structure including

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Below the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the game balls. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  Near the center of the game area 7 variably displayed and displayed a plurality of types of decorative patterns for presentation that can be identified based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, the hitting of the hit ball at the start winning opening 14). A variable display device 9 for deriving and displaying the result is arranged. In this embodiment, the variable display device 9 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and is configured such that decorative symbols are variably displayed in three columns of display areas (decorative symbol display areas) of left, middle, and right. ing.

  Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result is to stop and display the symbol (excluding temporary stop before execution of the so-called re-lottery effect and temporary stop before execution of the relief effect).

  In this embodiment, as the decorative symbols displayed in the three display areas of the variable display device 9, as shown in FIG. 2, “one” to “eight”, “spring”, “summer”, “autumn”, “Winter” numbers and letters are used. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the decorative patterns of “1” to “8”, “Spring”, “Summer”, “Autumn”, and “Winter” are “Hanafuda”. "Is attached. Specifically, “1” is the “Fuji Nitotogisu” tag, “2” is the “Ayame to Yatsuhashi” tag, “3” is the “Ume ni Guisu” tag, “4” is the “Chrysanthemum” "5" is for "Onodichi-style frog", "6" is for "Tatsumi ni", "seven" is for "Kiri ni To", and "8" is for "peony" "Butterfly" tag, "Spring" tag for "Cherry blossom curtain", "Summer" tag for "Susuki (or shaved) moon", "Autumn" tag for "Deer on autumn leaves", "Winter" It becomes a bill of "Pine and crane".

  During the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative symbols, in principle, the decorative symbols “1”, “2”, “three”,... “Winter” are displayed in order. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol variable display is such that numbers and characters attached to the bill are displayed in order as the flower card rotates. Note that the decorative symbol displayed in the left display area is called “left symbol”, the decorative symbol displayed in the middle display region is called “middle symbol”, and the decorative symbol displayed in the right display region is “ It is sometimes called “right design”.

  A special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8 that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided on the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, the special symbol display 8 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers “0” to “9”, for example. The special symbol display 8 may be configured to variably display more types of numbers such as “0” to “99” in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp a specific stop symbol.

  The variable display device 9 performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (production) during the variable symbol display period of the special symbol by the special symbol indicator 8. The variable display device 9 that performs variable display of decorative symbols is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. The special symbol display 8 that performs variable display of the special symbols is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board.

  At the bottom of the variable display device 9, a special symbol hold memory display comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the start winning opening 14, that is, the number of hold memories (also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). 18 is provided. Every time there is an effective start prize, the display color of one display is changed. Each time the variable display on the special symbol display 8 is started, the display color of one display is restored. In this example, since the special symbol display 8 and the special symbol hold memory display 18 are provided separately, the number of hold memories can be displayed even during variable display. In the display area of the variable display device 9, a special symbol reserved storage display area including four display areas for displaying the number of reserved memories may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved memories is 4, but the upper limit value may be a larger value. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

  Below the variable display device 9, there is provided a start winning opening 14 through which a game ball can be won. The game ball won in the start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the start opening switch 14a. The start winning opening 14 is provided with a variable winning ball device 15 that performs an opening / closing operation. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16 (not shown in FIG. 1). When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, it becomes easy for the game ball to win the start winning opening 14 (easy to start winning), which is advantageous to the player.

  A special variable winning device that is opened by the solenoid 21 in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is provided below the start winning opening 14. The special variable winning device includes an opening / closing plate 20 and forms a big winning opening. The game ball that has entered the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided directly above the variable display device 9. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When a game ball wins the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the left and right lamps (a symbol can be visually recognized when the lamp is lit). For example, if the left lamp is lit when the variable display ends, it is a hit. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 changes from a disadvantageous state to a player's advantageous state when the normal symbol is a winning symbol. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing to the gate 32, the normal symbol hold memory display 41 increments the LED to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  The game board 6 is provided with a plurality of winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39, and winning of game balls to the winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39 is performed by winning hole switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, respectively. Detected. Each winning opening 29, 30, 33, 39 constitutes a winning area provided in the game board 6 as an area for accepting game balls and allowing winning. The start winning opening 14 and the big winning opening also constitute a winning area that accepts game balls and allows winning. A decorative lamp 25 blinkingly displayed during the game is provided around the left and right of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in at the bottom. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c are provided. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure (such as a big prize opening) in the game area 7. The top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decorative LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine.

  Also, below the left speaker 27 is provided a prize ball LED 51 that is lit while paying out the prize ball, and below the right speaker 27 is provided a ball cut LED 52 that is lit when the supply ball is cut. Yes. Further, a prepaid card unit that enables lending of a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown). In addition, a status indicator for notifying the player of a gaming state inside the gaming machine (a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, and a short time state, which will be described later) is provided at a predetermined location on the gaming board 6 (not shown). ).

  In the gaming machine, a ball hitting device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the game area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. If the game ball enters the start winning opening 14 and is detected by the start opening switch 14a, the special symbol variable display can be started (for example, the end of the big hit game, the end of the small hit game, or the end of the previous variable display). The special symbol display 8 starts variable display (variation) of the special symbol, and the variable display device 9 starts variable display of the decorative symbol. If the variable symbol special display cannot be started, the reserved memory number for the special symbol storage memory display 18 is increased by one.

  The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the decorative symbol of the variable display device 9 stops when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the stop symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a probable variation symbol (excluding a sudden probability variation symbol described later) or a non-probability variation symbol of the big hit symbol, it shifts to a big hit gaming state (probable big hit or non-probable big hit (also called normal big hit)). . That is, the special variable prize-winning device is opened until a certain time (for example, 29.5 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the big prize opening. It should be noted that one round in the big hit gaming state is a period from when the special variable winning device is opened until a predetermined period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, ten) of hitting balls wins the big winning opening. In this embodiment, when the stop symbol is changed to the jackpot gaming state based on the probability variation symbol (excluding a sudden probability variation symbol described later) or the non-probability variation symbol, the jackpot gaming state is continued for 15 rounds. The

  In addition, when the stop symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a special probability variation symbol (hereinafter referred to as a sudden probability variation symbol), a special jackpot gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “suddenly sudden”) that makes the player recognize that the gaming state has suddenly shifted to the certain probability variation state. It is called probable big hit.) In the case of sudden probability big hit, the special variable winning device is opened twice for a short period (for example, 5 seconds). In the sudden probability change big hit, it is one round from when the special variable winning device is opened until it is closed, and the gaming state of the sudden probability change big hit is continued for two rounds. It should be noted that, in the sudden odds big win, the period during which the special variable prize winning device is opened is short, and ten game balls do not win while the special variable prize winning device is open. Therefore, until ten game balls win the big prize opening. Need not be defined as one round. When a sudden odd jackpot occurs, unlike in the case of 15 round jackpots, the effects of each round do not proceed in sequence on the variable display device 9, but the game state suddenly shifts to the probable state. A special performance is performed to show the person.

  Further, when the stop symbol at the time of the stop becomes a small hit symbol, the game shifts to a small hit game state in which the game value given to the player is smaller than the big hit game state. That is, it shifts to a gaming state in which the special variable winning device is opened twice only for a short period (for example, 5 seconds). In this way, in the small hit game state, the same game value as the game value given to the player when a sudden probability change big hit occurs is given. However, unlike the case of sudden probability change big hit, the gaming state is not shifted to the probability changing state after the small hit gaming state ends. From this, the player expects the occurrence of a probable big hit suddenly rather than the small hit. Even when a small hit occurs, a special effect similar to that at the time of sudden big odd hit is executed. Such a special effect is called a two-round effect.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the variable display device 9 are synchronized. Here, the synchronization means that the variable display period (variable display time) is the same. In addition, the display result on the special symbol display 8 (a special symbol stop symbol) corresponds to the display result on the variable display device 9 (decorative symbol stop symbol). The correspondence between the two symbols will be described later.

  Next, the type of gaming state and the transition of gaming state will be described.

  The probability variation state (probability variation state) refers to a gaming state that is advantageous to a player who has a higher probability of making a big hit (that is, the symbol is a big hit symbol) than the normal gaming state and the short-time state. In this embodiment, the term “probability change state” does not include a short time state of probability change described later unless explicitly stated.

  The time-short state (time shortening state) is a gaming state in which the variable symbol display time (variation time) of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the decorative symbol on the variable display device 9 is shorter than the normal gaming state and the probability variation state. I mean. By shortening the variable display time in this way, the variable display of symbols is frequently executed, and the probability of jackpot per unit time is improved, resulting in an advantageous state for the player. In the short time state, in the normal symbol display 10, the probability that the stop symbol becomes a winning symbol is higher than that in the normal gaming state and the probability variation state, and one of the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball device 15 or Both are higher than the normal gaming state and the probability variation state, and become a more advantageous state for the player. In the short time state, the variable symbol display time (variation time) of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is shorter than that of the normal game state and the probability change state. In this embodiment, the term “short-time state” does not include a short-term state of probability change described later unless explicitly stated.

  The probability change short state means a game state that is a probability change state and a time short state. The probabilistic short time state is a very advantageous state for the player.

  In this embodiment, the gaming state transitions as follows.

(1) When the normal game state and the short-time state, the probability change symbol (excluding the sudden probability variation symbol) will be a big hit, and when the big hit game ends, the gaming state is changed from the normal game state and the short-time state to the probability change time-short state . As a result, the probability that the special symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol become a winning symbol is increased, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased.

(2) When the probability variation state and the probability variation time short state, the probability variation symbol (excluding sudden probability variation symbol) will be a big hit, and when the big hit game ends, if the game state is the probability variation state, it will shift to the probability variation time short state, When the gaming state is the short state at the time of probability change, the short state at the time of probability change is maintained without changing. Thereby, the probability that the special symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol become a winning symbol is increased, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased.

(3) When the normal game state and the short-time state suddenly become a big hit with a probable change symbol, and when the big hit game ends, the gaming state is shifted from the normal game state and the short-time state to a positive change state. At this time, the probability that the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes a winning symbol is increased, but the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol is not increased, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is not shortened, and a variable prize is awarded. The opening time and the number of times of opening in the ball device 15 cannot be increased. It should be noted that after the sudden change game is suddenly ended, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be changed to the certainty state.

(4) When the probability change state and the probability change time short state suddenly a big hit with a probability change symbol, and when the big hit game ends, if the game state is the probability change state, the probability change state continues without changing, and the game state changes When it is in the short-time state, the state is shifted to the probability variation state. At this time, the probability that the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes a winning symbol is increased, but the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol is not increased, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is not shortened, and a variable prize is awarded. The opening time and the number of times of opening in the ball device 15 cannot be increased. In addition, after the sudden probability big hit game is ended, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be changed to the probability variation state.

(5) A big hit is made with a non-probable variation in the normal game state and the short-time state, and when the big-hit game is ended, the short-time state is controlled by a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after the big hit. That is, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the transition from the normal gaming state to the short-time state is made a predetermined number of times of variation, and when the gaming state is the short-time state, the short-time state is continued for a predetermined number of times of variation. At this time, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. Then, when the change of the predetermined number of changes is started, the gaming state is shifted from the short-time state to the normal gaming state.

(6) When the probability change state and the probability change time short state, a big hit is made with a non-probability variation symbol, and when the big hit game is ended, the time is controlled to a short time state by a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after the big hit ends. In other words, the state is shifted from the probability variation state and the probability variation short time state to the short time state by a predetermined number of fluctuations. At this time, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. Then, when the change of the predetermined number of changes is started, the gaming state is shifted from the short-time state to the normal gaming state.

(7) In the normal gaming state and the probability changing state, the small hit symbol is a small hit, and when the small hitting game ends, the normal gaming state and the probability changing state are continued without changing. In addition, after the end of the small hit game, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be shifted to the certain change state.

(8) When the time-short state and the probability change time short state, the small hit symbol is a small hit, and when the small hit game ends, the time-short state and the probability change time short state are continued without change. In addition, after the end of the small hit game, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be shifted to the certain change state.

  The transition of the gaming state as described above is an example, and the present invention is not limited to such a configuration.

  Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. In this embodiment, reach is achieved when the left symbol and the right symbol are aligned with the same symbol. The left and right symbols when reach occurs are called reach symbols. And if the middle symbol is stopped and displayed with the same symbol as the reach symbol, a big hit will be made.

  In this embodiment, when reach is established, an effect different from normal is performed with a lamp or sound. The effect and the reach display mode in the variable display device 9 are called reach effects. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (decoration design etc.)) or a background display mode (for example, color) of the variable display device 9 is displayed. May be changed.

  Next, the correspondence relationship between the stop symbol of the special symbol and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (the outlier symbol of both symbols, the probability variation symbol, the non-probability variation symbol, the sudden probability variation symbol, and the small hit symbol symbol) will be described.

(1) Special design stop design:
As described above, the special symbols variably displayed on the special symbol display 8 are “0” to “9”. Among these, “0” to “3”, “8”, “9” are outliers, “7” is a probability variable symbol, “6” is a non-probability variable symbol, and “5” is a sudden probability variable symbol. “4” is a small hit symbol.

(2) Decorative design stop design:
As described above, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are “one”, “two”, “three”, and “winter” symbols, respectively.

(2-1) A decorative symbol is a symbol with a combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that is not aligned in the same symbol (for example, “35-8”, etc .; Excluding symbols). Note that although the left and right decorative symbols are aligned in the same pattern (although it is a reach), the state in which only the decorative symbols in the middle are not aligned is also an outlier.

(2-2) The jackpot symbol of the decorative symbol is a symbol in a state where the combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is aligned in the same symbol. Among the jackpot symbols, the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is a certain symbol (“Three” “Five” “Seven” “Spring” “Summer” “Autumn” “Winter”). is there. In addition, among the jackpot symbols, the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is a non-probable variable symbol that is a combination of symbols other than a specific symbol (“1” “2” “4” “6” “8”). is there.

  In this embodiment, when the lottery effect after the big hit is performed, the stop symbol derived and displayed when the change is stopped does not correspond to the special symbol and the decorative symbol. For example, even if the stop symbol of the special symbol that is derived and displayed at the time of fluctuation stop is the probability variation symbol “7”, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that is derived and displayed at the time of fluctuation stop when executing the re-lottery effect after the big hit Is a non-probable variable “one” or the like. In this case, the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed as a stop symbol of the ornament symbol in the re-lottery effect after the big hit.

(2-3) In this embodiment, in order to notify the player that there is a high probability of being a big hit or a big hit, a decorative design before the start of the change of the decorative design (at the start) In the middle of the change, the effect of stopping and displaying the left, middle and right decorative symbols is executed. The temporary stop symbol of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed before the start of the variation of the decorative symbol is referred to as “pre-change symbol” or “pre-declining”. A temporary stop symbol of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the middle of the variation of the decorative symbol is referred to as a “fluctuating symbol”. When notifying the player that there is a high probability of being a big hit or a big hit, the combination of the left middle right pre-change symbol and the mid-change symbol is made a special symbol combination. Such a special combination of left, middle, and right symbols is called a chance for production. In this embodiment, a chance eye A and a chance eye B are provided as chance eyes in the production.

  As shown in FIG. 3, as the chance item A, 12 types of chance items (“1C” to 12C ”) are provided. Also, as shown in FIG. 4, as the chance item B, three types of chance items (“13C” to “15C”) are provided. The symbol (C) attached to each chance is an abbreviation of “Chance”. The player expects a big hit when the chance items A and B are stopped and displayed. Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, in this embodiment, “44, 4” and “55, 5”, which are the same as the big hit symbol, are also temporarily stopped and displayed as symbols before the start of change. Then, if “44, 4” or “55, 5” is displayed as a temporary stop, it is assumed that the occurrence of the big hit is confirmed.

  Note that the chance eye A is a combination of decorative symbols in which the role of “Sanko” is established. Sanko's role is to use the 20-point Hanafuda “Pine and Cranes (Winter)”, “Cherry Blossoms (Spring)”, “Susuki to Moon (Summer)”, “Onodichi Kaze to Frogs (5)”, “Kiri to Tsuji ( "7)" is established by a combination of three bills excluding "Onodichi-style frog". Therefore, the chance eye A is a combination of three symbols of “winter”, “spring”, “summer”, and “seven”. Opportunity B is a combination of decorative symbols in which the role of the “Saga deer butterfly” is established. The role of 猪 deer butterfly is established by the combination of “萩 to 萩 (six)”, “autumn to deer (autumn)” and “peony to butterfly (eight)”. Therefore, the chance eye B is a combination of symbols of “six”, “autumn”, and “eight”.

  When a missing symbol is determined, the determined missing symbol may accidentally become a chance eye A or a chance eye B. In this case, if the chance item A or the chance item B is derived and displayed, the player may misunderstand that the possibility of a big hit is high although the possibility of a big hit is not high. In order to avoid such misunderstandings, in this embodiment, control for prohibiting derivation and display of the same symbol as the chance eye A or chance eye B as a symbol is executed.

(2-4) The suddenly probable design of the decorative design is a design in which the combination of the left, middle and right decorative designs is “summer winter spring” as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, only one type of “Summer Winter Spring” is provided as a suddenly probable symbol. Suddenly probabilistic pattern "Summer Winter Spring" is also a combination of Sanko's roles. In addition, the suddenly probable pattern is also called a chance chance for sudden use.

  The sudden probability variation symbol is a kind of jackpot symbol, but it is desirable not to easily recognize the occurrence of the jackpot by the sudden probability variation symbol in order to make it appear that it has suddenly shifted to the probability variation state. For this reason, as described above, the suddenly probable symbols are different from the other jackpot symbols.

  When a missing symbol is determined, it may happen that the determined missing symbol suddenly suddenly becomes a probabilistic symbol. In this case, if the probability variation pattern is suddenly derived and displayed, the player may be misunderstood that the state has been shifted to the probability variation state without being shifted to the probability variation state. In order to avoid such misunderstandings, in this embodiment, a control is executed that prohibits suddenly derivation and display of the same symbol as the probability variation symbol as a symbol.

(2-5) The small hit design of the decorative design is also the same as the sudden probability variation design, and the combination of the left middle right decorative design is the “summer winter spring” design. There is only one kind of symbol “Summer Winter Spring”. A small hit symbol is also called a chance for a small hit.

  In this way, since the small winning symbol of the decorative symbol is the same as the suddenly probable symbol, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the sudden big odd hit or the small bonus has occurred from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. . In addition, as described above, since the same special performance is executed in the sudden probability change big hit state and the small hit state, the player suddenly has a probability change big hit from the contents of the production, or a small hit has occurred It will not be possible to recognize. In addition, if the game is controlled to either the probability variation state or the normal game state after the sudden probability big hit or small hit, the variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shortened in both the probability variation state and the normal game state. In addition, since the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are not improved and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is not shortened, the player cannot recognize to which state the gaming state has been changed. Therefore, the expectation for the transition to the probability change state by the player can be maintained after the sudden probability big hit or small hit ends. As for the special symbols, the sudden probability variation symbol is “5” and the small hit symbol is “4”, which are different symbols.

  When the missing symbol is determined, the determined missing symbol may accidentally become a small hit symbol. In this case, if the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that the probability change may have suddenly occurred (the player may have shifted to the probability change state). In order to avoid such a misunderstanding, in this embodiment, a control is executed to prohibit the same symbol as the small hit symbol from being derived and displayed as a symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the suddenly probable design and the small hit design of the decorative design are the same design ("Summer Winter Spring"). “Summer Winter Spring” and the small hits may be “Summer Spring Winter”).

  FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration in the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 6 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A basic circuit (corresponding to game control means) 53 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The basic circuit 53 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, and a game control microcomputer 560 having a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program. And an I / O port unit 57. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to include at least the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Further, the I / O port unit 57 may be incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 also includes an I / O port unit.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, hereinafter, the game control microcomputer 560 executes (or performs processing) specifically. Is that the CPU 56 executes control according to the program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31. The game control means is realized by a basic circuit 53 including a game control microcomputer 560.

  Also, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a and 39a to the basic circuit 53 is mounted on the main board 31 and is specially variable. A solenoid circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the winning device (opening / closing plate 20) and the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 according to a command from the basic circuit 53 is also mounted on the main board 31, and is used for game control when the power is turned on. In accordance with data provided from a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the microcomputer 560 and the basic circuit 53, an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state is sent to an external device such as a hall computer. Information output circuit 64 is also mounted on main board 31. It has been.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 performs display control of the special symbol display 8 that variably displays the special symbol, and also performs display control of the normal symbol display 10 that variably displays the normal symbol. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 controls the display state of the special symbol hold storage display 18 and also controls the display state of the normal symbol hold storage display 41.

  The hitting ball launching device that hits and launches the game ball launches the game ball toward the game area 7 as the launch motor 94 rotates. A power signal for driving the firing motor 94 is supplied to the firing motor 94 via the touch sensor substrate 90 from a power source mounted on a power supply board (not shown). A connection signal (VL signal) is input from the card unit 50 to the touch sensor substrate 90 via the interface substrate 66. Further, the touching of the operation knob (hitting ball handle) 5 by the player is detected by a touch sensor mounted on the touch sensor substrate 90. Then, the detection signal from the touch sensor and the signal from the power source are input to one AND circuit on the touch sensor substrate 90, and the output signal of the one AND circuit and the VL signal from the card unit 50 are the touch sensor substrate. 90 is input to another AND circuit, and a signal is output from the other AND circuit to the firing motor 94. Therefore, when the detection signal is not output from the touch sensor because the VL signal from the card unit 50 is not output to the touch sensor substrate 90 or the player does not touch the operation knob 5, the firing motor 94 Driving is stopped.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The display control of the variable display device 9 that receives and variably displays the decorative design is performed.

  FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 7, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 100 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a strobe signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77. In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the variable display device 9 using the LCD based on the effect control command.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 allows the signal input from the relay board 77 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit is installed. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 7 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the input / output port 105. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the input / output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input / output driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input / output driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are transmitted bidirectionally between the effect control microcomputer 100, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 (a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side). Communication).

  The effect control microcomputer 100 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM stores character image data that is frequently used among images displayed on the variable display device 9, specifically, people, characters, figures, symbols, and the like (including decorative designs). Is. The effect control microcomputer 100 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control of the variable display device 9 based on data input from the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the variable display device 9 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100 and maps the VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the variable display device 9.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by game control means (game control microcomputer 560: CPU 56 and peripheral circuits such as ROM 54 and RAM 55) on the main board 31. When power is turned on to the gaming machine and the input level of the reset terminal becomes high level, the gaming control microcomputer 560 starts main processing after step S1. In the main process, the game control microcomputer 560 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). Then, the built-in device register is initialized (step S4). Further, after initialization (step S5) of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits), the RAM is set in an accessible state (step S6). The interrupt mode 2 is an address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the game control microcomputer 560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device. Is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the state of the output signal of a clear switch (not shown) input via the input port only once (step S7). When ON is detected in the confirmation, the game control microcomputer 560 executes normal initialization processing (steps S11 to S14).

  If the clear switch is not in the on state, whether or not data protection processing of the backup RAM area of the RAM 55 (for example, processing for stopping power supply such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (Step S8). If it is confirmed that such a protection process is not performed, the game control microcomputer 560 executes an initialization process. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process. In this example, if “55H” is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is a backup (ON state), and if a value other than “55H” is set, it means that there is no backup (OFF state).

  When it is confirmed that there is a backup, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S9). In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power outage or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the game control microcomputer 560 returns the game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Is performed (step S10). Then, the saved value of the PC (program counter) stored in the backup RAM area is set in the PC, and the address is restored.

  In the initialization process, the game control microcomputer 560 first performs a RAM clear process (step S11). In addition, a predetermined work area (for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a special symbol process flag, a payout command storage pointer, a winning ball flag, a ball out flag, a payout stop flag, etc. A work area setting process for setting an initial value to a flag for selectively performing processing according to the state is performed (step S12). Further, a process of transmitting an initialization command for initializing the sub-boards (the payout control board 37 and the effect control board 80 in this embodiment) to each sub-board is executed (step S13). Examples of the initialization command include a command indicating an initial design of a decorative design displayed on the variable display device 9.

  Then, the CTC register provided in the game control microcomputer 560 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every 2 ms (step S14). That is, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S11 to S14) is completed, the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) are repeatedly executed in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. (Step S19). The display random number is a random number for determining a special symbol losing symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8 or a random number for determining a pattern variation pattern. The display random number update process is a display random number. This is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for use. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining an initial value of a count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a big hit determination random number generation counter). In a game control process described later, when the count value of the jackpot determination random number generation counter makes one round, an initial value is set in the counter.

  Note that when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt is prohibited. The display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are also executed in the timer interrupt process described later. This is to avoid competing with the processing in the timer interrupt processing. That is, a timer interrupt is generated during the processing of step S17 or step S18, and a counter value for generating a display random number during the timer interrupt processing or a counter count value for generating an initial value random number If updated, the continuity of the count value may be impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt disabled state is set during the processing of step S17 and step S18.

  Next, the game control process will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs during the execution of the main process, specifically, in the period when the interrupt is permitted during the execution of the loop process of steps S16 to S19, the game control microcomputer 560 displays FIG. The timer interruption process of steps S20 to S37 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not an on state has been entered) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off process, when it is detected that the power-off signal is output, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a power supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, and the state determination is performed (switch processing: Step S21).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 controls the display of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the special symbol hold memory indicator 18, the normal symbol hold memory indicator 41, and a status indicator (not shown). A display control process is performed (step S22). For the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, and the status indicator, control for outputting a drive signal to each indicator is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S34 to S36.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a big hit determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step) S23). The game control microcomputer 560 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: step S24, S25).

Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Decide whether or not to generate a big hit (and whether or not to generate a big hit) (for big hit determination)
(2) Random 2: Determine the type of jackpot (for determining the jackpot type)
(3) Random 3: Determine the special symbol's off symbol (for determining off symbol)
(4) Random 4: Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (for variation pattern determination) (5) Random 5: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for determination per normal symbol)
(6) Random 6: Determine the initial value of random 1 (for determining the random 1 initial value)
(7) Random 7: Determine the initial value of random 5 (for determining the random 5 initial value)

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 9, the game control microcomputer 560 uses (1) big hit determination random number, (2) big hit type determination random number, and (5) normal symbol determination determination. A counter for generating a random number is incremented (added by 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In order to enhance the game effect, random numbers other than the random numbers (1) to (7) are also used.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a special symbol process (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special variable winning device (large winning a prize port) in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 performs normal symbol process processing (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. By executing the normal symbol process, the display control of the normal symbol display 10 and the opening / closing control of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are executed.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a process of sending an effect control command or the like related to display control of the decorative symbols in the variable display device 9 (decorative symbol command control processing: step S28).

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a (step). S30). Specifically, the payout control mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on any of the start opening switch 14a, the count switch 23 and the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a being turned on. A payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a test terminal process which is a process for generating and outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine (step S31). Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a drive command is issued to the solenoid circuit 59 (step S32: output process). The solenoid circuit 59 drives the solenoids 16 and 21 in accordance with a drive command in order to open the variable winning ball device 15 or the opening / closing plate 20 in the open state or the closed state.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of reserved storage (step S33).

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in accordance with the value of the special symbol process flag in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data. A control process is performed (step S34). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a special symbol variable display on the special symbol display 8 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data in accordance with the value of the normal symbol process flag. A control process is performed (step S35). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may change the display rate (“○” and “×”) every 0.2 seconds when the normal symbol fluctuation speed is 0.2 seconds. Further, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a normal symbol effect display on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a state display lamp display process for setting the state display control data for displaying the state display lamp in accordance with the game state in the output buffer for setting the state display control data (step). S36). The game control microcomputer 560 executes the display of the status indicator lamp by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S37), and the process ends.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of steps S21 to S36 in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIGS. 10 and 11 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. FIG. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the special symbol display 8 is executed.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 performs the special symbol process, if the start opening switch 14a for detecting that a game ball has won the start winning opening 14 provided in the game board 6 is turned on. That is, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the start winning opening 14 has occurred (step S311), it is confirmed whether or not the reserved memory number (start winning memory number) has reached the upper limit value (held memory number = 4). (Step S312).

  When the number of reserved memories has not reached the upper limit (N in step S312), the game control microcomputer 560 extracts software random numbers (such as a counter value for generating a big hit determination random number, etc.) Is stored in the storage area in the reserved storage buffer corresponding to the value of the reserved storage number counter as the extracted random number value (step S313). Extracting a random number means reading a count value from a counter for generating a random number and setting the read count value as a random value. In step S313, random 1 to random 4 are extracted from the above random numbers. In the reserved storage buffer, the same number of storage areas as the upper limit value of the reserved storage number are secured. Further, a counter for generating a jackpot determination random number and the like and a holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the reserved memory counter indicating the number of reserved memories by 1 (step S314). Although not shown in FIG. 10, when the value of the pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, the start prize memory designation command (the start prize memory designation command at this time is the start prize memory number when the start prize is generated). Is a command indicating that +1 has been added). Thereafter, any one of steps S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag).

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): When the microcomputer 560 for game control is in a state where variable symbol special display can be started, the number of numerical data stored in the reserved memory buffer (the number of reserved memories) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the hold storage counter. Then, if the count value of the holding storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit (whether or not the display result of the variable symbol special display is the specific display result). In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set, and the type of big hit (non-probable big hit, probable big hit, sudden probable big hit, etc.) is determined. If it is not a big hit, it is determined whether to make a small hit. In the case of a small hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S301.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): For determining a variation pattern that is extracted when a variation pattern of variable display of a special symbol (effect mode during symbol variation: variation time is also specified by the variation pattern) is generated at the time of start winning. Selection is made from among a plurality of types of variation patterns determined in advance according to the value of a random number (one of display random numbers). Further, based on the determined variation pattern, after setting the variable display time (variation time) until the special symbol is variably displayed and derived and displayed in the special symbol process timer, the special symbol process timer is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S302.

  Special symbol changing process (step S302): When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the special symbol process timer set in step S301 times out), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is changed. The value is updated according to step S303.

  Special symbol stop process (step S303): The variable symbol display on the special symbol indicator 8 is stopped and the stop symbol is displayed. In addition, an effect control command (decorative symbol stop designation command) for designating the stop of variable display of the decorative symbols on the variable display device 9 is transmitted to the effect control board 80. If the jackpot flag is set, the time from when the jackpot symbol is stopped until the jackpot game starts (the jackpot display time) is set in the jackpot control timer, and then the jackpot control timer is started. Let In addition, the effect control board 80 is provided with an effect control command (fanfare command) for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to execute a signal effect (fanfare effect) indicating that the jackpot game is started after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. Send. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S304. When the small hit flag is set, after setting the time from the stop display of the small hit symbol to the start of the small hit game (small hit display time) in the big prize control timer, Start the control timer. Also, after the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, a special effect in the small hit game (the effect for the second round; the effect for the two rounds is the same effect as the effect that is executed in the event of a sudden chance of big hit) An effect control command (fanfare command) to be executed by the control microcomputer 100 is transmitted to the effect control board 80. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S308. When the big hit flag and the small hit flag are not set, the internal state is updated to a value according to step S300.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S304): When the big hit display time has elapsed, control for opening the large winning opening is started. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable prize-winning device to open the big prize opening. The number of rounds is counted by a counter. Also, the execution time (round time) of the special winning opening control process is set in the special winning opening control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305.

  Processing for opening a special prize opening (step S305): A process for confirming the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. When the closing condition for the big prize opening is established, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the special winning prize opening by closing the special variable prize winning device. In addition, the time (interval time) from the end of the round to the start of the next round is set in the big prize opening control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S306.

  Post-winner opening process (step S306): When the interval time has elapsed, it is confirmed whether there is a remaining round. If there are remaining rounds, control to open the big prize opening is started. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable prize-winning device to open the big prize opening. The number of rounds is counted by a counter. Also, the execution time (round time) of the special winning opening control process is set in the special winning opening control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305. On the other hand, when all rounds are finished, an effect control command (ending command) for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform an effect (ending effect) for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is issued. After transmitting to the effect control board 80 and setting the execution time of the big hit end process (big hit end time) in the big prize opening control timer, the internal state is updated to a value according to step S307.

  Big hit end process (step S307): A predetermined flag set / reset process for ending the big hit gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state is updated to a value corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): When the small hit display time or interval time has elapsed, it is checked whether there is a remaining round. If there are remaining rounds, control to open the big prize opening is started. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable prize-winning device to open the big prize opening. The number of rounds is counted by a counter. Also, the execution time (round time) of the small hit release process is set in the big prize opening control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S309. On the other hand, when all rounds are finished, after setting the execution time of the small hit end process (small hit end time) in the big prize opening control timer, the internal state is updated to a value according to step S310.

  Small hit opening process (step S309): A process for confirming the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition for the big prize opening is established, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the special winning prize opening by closing the special variable prize winning device. Then, the time (interval time) from the end of the round to the start of the next round is set in the big prize opening control timer, and the internal state is updated to a value according to step S308.

  Small hit ending process (step S310): A predetermined flag setting / resetting process for ending the small hit gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state is updated to a value corresponding to step S300.

  12 and 13 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control board 80. FIG. In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration. The first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12, commands 8000 (H) to 806C (H) are effect control commands (variation) for designating a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the variable display device 9 in response to variable display of special symbols. Pattern command). The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start.

  Commands 8 </ b> C <b> 00 (H) to 8 </ b> C <b> 06 (H) are effect control commands for designating the contents of the stop symbols (display results) of the decorative symbols in the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, commands 8C00 (H) to 8C06 (H) are referred to as symbol information designation commands.

  The command 8C00 (H) is an effect control command (outgoing designation command) for designating that the stop symbol (display result) of the special symbol is determined as the offcoming symbol. Command 8C01 (H) is an effect control command (ordinary big hit designation command) that designates that the stop symbol of the special symbol has been decided as a non-probable variation symbol (that is, a non-probability variation big hit (also referred to as a normal big hit)). ).

  Command 8C02 (H) is an effect control command (designated to specify that the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be a probable variation symbol (that is, probable variation jackpot is determined), and that a re-lottery effect is not to be executed after the jackpot game starts. 1 specified command per probability variation. Command 8C03 (H) is an effect control command (probability variable big hit 2 designation command) that designates that the stop symbol of the special symbol is decided as the probability varying symbol and that it is decided to execute the re-lottery effect during the big hit game. Command 8C04 (H) is an effect control command (probability variable big hit) that specifies that the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be a probable change symbol and that a re-lottery effect is determined to be executed after the jackpot game ends (during the ending effect). 3 designation command).

  Here, the “re-lottery effect” refers to an effect that makes it appear that the jackpot symbol is re-lotted and displayed after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9. Specifically, when it is determined in advance that the jackpot symbol (non-probability variable symbol or probability variable symbol) is derived and displayed on the variable display device 9, the left, right and right decorative symbols are the same in the variable display device 9. This is an effect of deriving and displaying a jackpot symbol (non-probability variation symbol or probability variation symbol) after stopping and displaying the non-probability variation symbol and then changing the non-probability variation symbol again (see FIG. 138). The re-lottery effect includes a case where a non-probable variable symbol is promoted to a probable variable symbol (when a non-probable variable symbol is displayed after being stopped), and a case where a non-probable variable symbol is not promoted to a probable variable symbol (a non-probable variable symbol is displayed). When the non-probable variation symbol is derived and displayed again after the stop display. The re-lottery effect that promotes a non-probable variable symbol to a probabilistic symbol is called “promotion effect” or “rising effect”.

  In this embodiment, the timing for executing the re-drawing effect is “during symbol change”, “during big hit game”, “after big hit game is over”. When the game control microcomputer 560 causes the effect control microcomputer 100 to execute the re-lottery effect during “in the process of changing the symbol”, the game control microcomputer 560 specifies the execution of the re-lottery effect using the change pattern command. Further, when the game control microcomputer 560 causes the production control microcomputer 100 to execute the re-lottery effect “during the big hit game” or “after the big hit game is finished”, the “in jackpot game” is executed by the symbol information designation command. Alternatively, the execution of the re-drawing effect “after the end of the big hit game” is designated. The effect control microcomputer 100 executes the re-lottery effect at a predetermined timing based on the contents of the variation pattern command or the symbol information designation command. In this embodiment, in the re-lottery effect during the big hit game or after the end of the big hit game, only the re-lottery effect that promotes the non-probable variable symbol to the positive variable symbol is executed.

  Command 8C05 (H) is an effect control command (suddenly probable big hit designation command) for designating that the stop symbol of the special symbol has been suddenly determined to be a probable change symbol (that is, that it has been determined to be suddenly probable big hit). Command 8C06 (H) is an effect control command (small hit designation command) that designates that the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined as the small hit symbol (that is, determined as the small hit symbol).

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (decorative symbol stop designation command) for designating stop of variable display (fluctuation) of decorative symbols on the variable display device 9.

  Commands 9500 (H) to 9503 (H) are effect control commands (background designation commands) for designating background display according to the gaming state in the variable display device 9. Command 9500 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the normal gaming state. The command 9501 (H) is an effect control command (high probability state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the probability variation state (high probability state). The command 9502 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the time-short state. The command 9503 (H) is an effect control command (chance state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the chance mode state. The chance mode is an effect mode in which an expectation for the transition to the probability change state is given after the sudden probability big hit and the small hit end.

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating display during the customer waiting demonstration.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13, commands A000 (H) to A004 (H) are effect control commands (fanfare designation commands) for designating that a big hit game is started. Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 1 designation command) that designates the start of a big hit when a normal big hit (non-probable big hit) is determined. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 2 designation command) that designates the start of a big hit when it is determined that the probability variation big hit is determined and the re-lottery effect is not executed after the big hit game is started. Command A002 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 3 designation command) that designates the start of a big hit when it is determined that a probability variation big hit is determined and a re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit game. Command A003 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 4 designation command) that designates the start of a jackpot when it is decided that a re-lottery effect is to be executed after the jackpot game is determined and the re-lottery effect is executed after the jackpot game ends (during the ending effect) ). Command A004 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 5 designation command) that designates the start of sudden probability variation jackpot.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command for opening a big prize opening) that designates display during a round in the 15 round jackpot game. The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big prize opening) that designates display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) in the 15 round big hit game. Note that the number of rounds displayed in “XX” is set.

  Commands A301 (H) to A305 (H) are effect control commands (ending designation commands) that designate the end of the big hit game. The command A301 (H) is an effect control command (ending 1 designation command) for designating the end of the normal jackpot game (displaying that the game will shift to the short time state after the jackpot game is finished). Command A302 (H) is an effect control command (ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of jackpot when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined and the re-lottery effect is not executed after the jackpot game is started. Command A303 (H) is an effect control command (ending 3 designation command) for designating the end of the big hit when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined and the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit game. Command A304 (H) is an effect control command (ending 4 designation command) that is promoted to a probable variation symbol in the re-lottery effect after the end of the big hit game (during the ending effect) and designates that it will be a promising big hit. Command A 305 (H) is an effect control command (ending 5 designation command) for designating the end of sudden probability variation jackpot. Note that the command A 302 (H) and the command A 303 (H) may be a common command. In this case, the common command is an effect control command for designating the end of the jackpot when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined and the re-lottery effect is not to be executed after the jackpot game ends (during the ending effect). The

  Command A4XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command for opening a big prize opening) that designates a round in a two-round big hit game (suddenly probable big hit game). The command A5XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big prize opening) that designates display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) in the two round big hit game (suddenly probable big hit game). In “XX”, the number of rounds is set.

  Command A600 (H) is an effect control command (small hit fanfare designation command) that designates that a small hit game is to be started.

  The command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (start winning memory designation command) for designating the number of starting winning memories indicated by XX.

  When the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31, the contents shown in FIGS. Accordingly, the display state of the variable display device 9 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the sound output board 70. It should be noted that effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, when displaying the number of winning balls that is a big hit on the variable display device 9, an effect control command for designating the count number of the count switch 23 is also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

  FIG. 14 and FIG. 15 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a variation pattern used in this embodiment. In FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, “extended data” indicates EXT data of the second byte in the effect control command having a two-byte structure.

  In this example, each variation pattern of the special symbol includes a variation pattern when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is “out-of-line” (a variation pattern dedicated to loss), and a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (at the time of the variable stop before the big hit) When the stop symbol is “non-probable variable” or “probable variable”, the fluctuation pattern (normal big hit / probable big hit combined fluctuation pattern) and the decorative symbol stop symbol (stop symbol at the time of variable stop before big hit) Variation pattern when “probability variation” (variation pattern dedicated to probability variation big hit) and variation pattern when decoration symbol stop symbol (stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop before big hit) becomes “non-probability variation” (normal) A variation pattern dedicated to big hits), a variation pattern when the stop symbol of the decorative pattern is "Suddenly Probable Change", and a stop pattern of the decorative symbol is "Small Ri are distinguished in the variation pattern when the symbol "(variation pattern of Koatari only).

  As a fluctuation pattern dedicated to the deviation in the normal production mode (production mode other than the chance mode), the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation without the reach in the normal gaming state, and the short time state (including the short time state of the probable change time) Normal fluctuation fluctuation pattern with no reach, fluctuation pattern with normal reach (simple reach mode), fluctuation pattern with super reach A, fluctuation pattern with super reach B, and super reach C Variation patterns are provided. In addition, as a variation pattern dedicated to the detachment in the chance mode, the variation pattern of the chance mode normal variation without the reach in the normal gaming state in the chance mode, and the short time state in the chance mode (including the probable time short state) In this case, there is provided a fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation in the chance mode without reach at the time of

  Here, “normal reach” refers to the case where the middle symbol changes rapidly after the reach is established, the change rate / direction of the middle symbol changes after the reach is established, or after the reach is established. There are cases where a character appears or the background changes after reach is established. However, in the case of normal reach, the mode of production is relatively simple. On the other hand, “super reach” combines a plurality of effects of normal reach, develops from normal reach to another effect, or executes an effect with a story. In the case of super reach, an effect that makes it possible to expect a big hit than normal reach is performed. In general, the fluctuation time is set longer in the super reach than in the normal reach. It should be noted that a specific effect mode of normal reach will be described later with reference to FIGS. 124 and 158 (FIG. 158 is Embodiment 3), and a specific effect mode of super reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 125, 126 and 159. This will be described later with reference to FIG. 162 (FIGS. 159 to 162 are Embodiment Modes 3).

  As a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probability big hit, a variation pattern with super reach A, a variation pattern with super reach B, and a variation pattern with super reach C are provided. Further, the variation patterns having the same contents are divided into a variation pattern in which the re-lottery effect is executed during the variation of the symbols and a variation pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not performed. In addition, for the normal big hit / probable big hit combined variation pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not executed, the “relief” effect (for example, the character that has been temporarily stopped and displayed) There is also provided a variation pattern for deriving and displaying the jackpot symbol by executing an effect to replace the jackpot symbol).

  As a variation pattern dedicated to the probability variation big hit, a variation pattern with normal reach and a variation pattern with super reach C are provided. Further, the variation patterns having the same contents are divided into a variation pattern in which the re-lottery effect is executed during the variation of the symbols and a variation pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not performed.

  Usually, the only variation pattern for big hits is the variation pattern with normal reach. Note that the variation patterns having the same contents are divided into a variation pattern in which the re-lottery effect is executed during the variation of the symbol and a variation pattern in which the variation is not performed.

  Two types of variation patterns of sudden probability variation entry fluctuation are provided as variation patterns dedicated to sudden probability variation big hits. In addition, two types of variation patterns for small hit rush variation are provided as variation patterns dedicated to small hits. In this embodiment, the variation pattern dedicated to sudden probability variation big hit and the variation pattern dedicated to small hit are the same during the variation. Note that a variation pattern dedicated to sudden probability variation big hit and a variation pattern dedicated to small hit may be used as a common variation pattern (variation pattern common to sudden / small hits). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 does not suddenly determine the probability variation symbol or the small hit symbol based on the content of the variation pattern command, but suddenly changes the probability variation symbol or the small bonus symbol based on the content of the symbol information designation command. The design will be determined.

  In the contents of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, “slip” means that the fluctuating symbol temporarily stops after a temporary stop, and “return” means fluctuation. This means that the symbol that has been temporarily stopped temporarily returns to a predetermined number of frames in the reverse direction.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, a predetermined variation time is preset for each variation pattern, and the production control microcomputer 100 specifies the variation time together with the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command. Is possible.

  16 to 18 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 560 can start the variation of the special symbol (when the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300, that is, the special symbol indicator If the special symbol change display is not made in step 8 and the big hit game is not being played or the small hit game is not being played (step S51), the start winning memory number (holding memory number) is confirmed (step S52). Specifically, the count value of the hold storage counter is confirmed.

  If the starting winning memory number is not 0, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the starting winning memory number = 1 is read and stored in the random number storage buffer of the RAM 55 (step S53), and the starting winning memory number 1 is reduced by 1 and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S54). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the start winning memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the starting winning memory number = n−1.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the current game state (normal game state, probability change state, short time state, etc.), and sets the address of the background designation command transmission table corresponding to the game state to the pointer (step). S55). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a command set process (FIG. 33) described later (step S56). If the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, a normal state background designation command is transmitted. If the current gaming state is the probability variation time short state, the probability variation state background designation command is transmitted, and the current gaming state is a time shortening. If it is in the state, a short time background designation command is transmitted. In this embodiment, a chance state background designation command is transmitted when the mode is changed to the chance mode suddenly after the end of a game with a promising big hit or a small hit.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number from the random number storage buffer (step S57), and executes the jackpot determination processing module (step S58). The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process of comparing a jackpot determination value determined in advance with a random number value for jackpot determination and determining that the jackpot determination value is a jackpot if they match. Here, in the jackpot determination, when the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state, probability change short state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal game state and short time state). It is comprised so that it may become. Specifically, a high-probability jackpot determination table in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and a low-probability jackpot determination table in which the number of jackpot determination values is set smaller than the high-probability jackpot determination table are provided. Keep it. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state. If the gaming state is a high probability state, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the high probability jackpot determination table to perform the jackpot determination process. If the gaming state is a low probability state, a big hit determination process is performed using a low probability big hit determination table. With such a configuration, the probability of a big hit is higher in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

  Whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state and probability variation time short state) is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag indicating that the game state is the probability variation state and the probability variation time short state is set. Is done.

  FIGS. 19A and 19B show the distribution ratios of the determination values in the jackpot determination table in this embodiment. FIG. 19A shows the distribution ratio of the judgment values in the jackpot judgment table in the low probability state (normal game state and short time state), and FIG. 19B shows the high probability state (probability variation state, probability variation short time state). The distribution ratio of the judgment value in the jackpot judgment table at the time is shown. As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, in this embodiment, the number of random numbers for jackpot determination is 65536. That is, the range of the random number value for jackpot determination is 0 to 65535. The number of jackpot determination values at low probability is 165, and the jackpot probability at low probability is 0.0025177 (1 / 37.2). Further, the number of jackpot determination values at the time of high probability is 1650, which is 10 times the number of jackpot determination values at the time of low probability, and the jackpot probability at the time of high probability is 0.0251770 (1 / 39.7).

  If it is determined in the big hit determination module that the big hit is not made (N in step S59), the game control microcomputer 560 proceeds to the process in step S64 in FIG.

  When it is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination module (Y in step S59), a big hit flag is set (step S60). The game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot type determination random number from the random number storage buffer (step S61), and hits the jackpot type (normal jackpot, probability variable jackpot, probability variable jackpot, jackpot that executes the re-lottery effect during the jackpot game. After the game is over, a process of determining a probability variation big hit for executing a re-lottery effect or a sudden probability variation big hit) is executed (step S62).

  The jackpot type determination process is performed using a jackpot type determination table. In the jackpot type determination table, as shown in FIG. 19C, a predetermined number of jackpot type determination random number values are assigned in advance for each jackpot type. Specifically, the number of random numbers for determining the jackpot type is 100 (that is, the range of random numbers for determining the jackpot type is 0 to 99), of which 0 to 32 are assigned to “normal”, and 33 to 69 are set. “Probability variation 1” is allocated, 70 to 74 are allocated to “probability variation 2”, 75 to 79 are allocated to “probability variation 3”, and 80 to 99 are allocated to “sudden probability variation (2R)”. Here, “normal” indicates a normal jackpot, “probability variation 1” indicates a probability variation jackpot (no re-lottery effect), “probability variation 2” indicates a probability variation jackpot (execution of a re-lottery effect during the jackpot), and “probability variation 3”. "" Indicates a probability variation big hit (execution of redrawing effect by ending), and "Sudden probability variation (2R)" indicates a sudden probability variation big hit. The game control microcomputer 560 determines the big hit type, that is, the normal big hit, the probable big hit (no redrawing effect), the probable big hit (during the big hit) depending on which range the random number for determining the big hit type read in step S61 belongs. Either re-lottery effect execution), probability variation jackpot (re-lottery effect execution at ending) or sudden probability variation jackpot is determined. In this way, by determining the big hit type, not only whether the big hit is a normal big hit, a probable big hit, or a sudden probable big hit, whether to execute a re-lottery effect (promotion effect) after the big hit game starts, The timing at which the performance is executed is also determined.

  The proportion of the decorative symbols that contain a specific symbol (a symbol that is a probable big hit when aligned on the effective line) is 7 / 12≈58.3%. That is, as described above, there are 12 patterns of Chinese numerals “1” “2” “3” “4” “5” “6” “seven” “8” “spring” “summer” “autumn” “winter”. It will be a big hit when it is aligned, but it will be a promising big hit when 7 symbols of “3”, “5”, “7”, “Spring”, “Summer”, “Autumn”, and “Winter” are gathered. The ratio of specific symbols is 7/12 = 58.3%.

  On the other hand, the probability of a probabilistic big hit (excluding sudden probable big hits) with respect to the probability of a big round of 15 rounds (15 round normal big hits and 15 rounds probable big hits), that is, “normal” “probability 1” “probability” As shown in FIG. 19C, the ratio at which “probability variation 1”, “probability variation 2”, and “probability variation 3” are determined with respect to the ratio in which “2” “probability variation 3” is determined is (37 + 5 + 5) / (33 + 37 + 5 + 5) = 47/80 = 58.75%. In addition, the probability that the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed when the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped with respect to the probability that the big hit symbol indicating the big hit of 15 rounds is derived and displayed when the variation of the ornament symbol is stopped, that is, “normal”, “probability variation 1”, “probability variation 2”. As shown in FIG. 19 (C), the ratio at which “probability variation 3” is determined is (37) / (33 + 37 + 5 + 5) = 37/80 = 46.25%. is there. That is, when the big hit of 15 rounds ("normal", "probability change 1", "probability change 2", "probability change 3") is determined, when the normal big hit is determined (when "normal" is determined), A variation pattern command dedicated to normal big hit is sent, and a non-probable variation symbol is determined as a stop symbol at the time of variation stop based on that command, or a variation pattern command for both probable big hit / normal big hit is sent and normal big hit Designated symbol information designation commands are transmitted, and a non-probable variation symbol is determined as a halt symbol at the time of variation stop based on those commands. In addition, when it is decided to promote to a probable big hit in the re-draw lottery effect after the start of the big hit game (when “probable change 2” or “probable change 3” is determined), a variation pattern command dedicated to normal big hit is sent Based on the command, the non-probable variation symbol is determined as the stop symbol at the time of variation stop, or the variation pattern command for both probable big hit / normal big hit is transmitted and the design with two probable big hits or three probable big hits is designated An information designation command is transmitted, and an uncertain variable symbol is determined as a stop symbol at the time of a variable stop based on these commands. On the other hand, out of the cases where 15 round big hits (“normal”, “probability change 1”, “probability change 2”, “probability change 3”) are determined, when the probability change big hit (without re-drawing effect) is determined (“probability change 1” is When it is determined), a variation pattern command dedicated to probability variation jackpot is transmitted and the probability variation symbol is determined as a stop symbol at the time of variation stop based on that command, or the variation pattern command for both probability variation big hit / normal big hit is At the same time, a symbol information designation command with one designation per probability variation is transmitted, and a probability variation symbol is determined as a stop symbol at the time of a variable stop based on those commands. In this way, except when “probability variation 1” is determined, since the non-probability variation symbol is determined as the stop symbol at the time of variation stoppage, the probability variation symbol is derived when the decoration symbol variation stop for the probability of a big hit of 15 rounds. The probability of display is (37) / (33 + 37 + 5 + 5) = 37/80 = 46.25%.

  As described above, the proportion of decorative symbols that include a specific symbol (the proportion of a specific symbol), the probability that a probability variation jackpot is determined relative to the probability of a big hit of 15 rounds (the proportion of probability variation jackpots), and 15 rounds The probability that the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed with respect to the probability that the symbol jackpot representing the big hit is derived and displayed is different from the probability that the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed. However, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the jackpot type regardless of the ratio of the specific symbol (step S62), and the effect control command (variation pattern command, (Design information designation command) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. Then, as will be described later, the production control microcomputer 100 is divided into jackpot types (including the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect and the execution timing of the re-lottery effect) based on the contents of the production control command from the game control microcomputer 560. The corresponding jackpot symbol is determined and displayed when the fluctuation is stopped (see steps S620 and S626). Therefore, it is possible to easily increase / decrease the ratio of a specific symbol according to the specifications of the gaming machine, change the ratio of probability variation big hit, or set a re-lottery effect after the big hit game starts.

  Although not shown in FIG. 16, there is only one special jackpot symbol depending on the jackpot type, so the jackpot symbol is automatically determined by determining the jackpot type. The Specifically, the non-probability variable symbol “6” is determined for a normal big hit (non-probable big hit), the probabilistic variable symbol “7” is determined for a probable big hit, and the sudden probable symbol “5” for a sudden probable big hit. Will be determined.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores (stores) the decorative symbol information corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step S62 in the decorative symbol information buffer (step S63), and proceeds to the processing of step S72 of FIG. .

  In step S63, after the decorative symbol information corresponding to the jackpot type is stored in the decorative symbol information buffer, the decorative symbol command control processing (step S28, FIG. 32) is executed in response to the occurrence of the timer interrupt, and the command set is set. Processing (FIG. 33) is executed, and command transmission processing (FIG. 34) is executed. Thus, a symbol information designation command (normal jackpot designation command, probability variation big hit 1 designation command, probability variation big hit 2 designation command, probability variation big hit 3 designation command, sudden probability variation big hit designation command) according to the big hit type is transmitted. Detailed contents will be described later.

  In step S64 of FIG. 17, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a small hit determination module that determines whether or not to make a small hit based on the value of the big hit determination random number read in step S57 (step S64). . The small hit determination module is a program that compares a small hit determination value determined in advance in the small hit determination table with a random number for determining a big hit, and executes a process of determining a small hit when they match. .

  FIGS. 19A and 19B show the distribution ratios of the determination values in the small hit determination table in this embodiment. FIG. 19A shows the distribution ratio of the determination values in the small hit determination table in the low probability state (normal game state and short time state), and FIG. 19B shows the high probability state (probability change state, probability change short time state). ) Shows the distribution ratio of determination values in the small hit determination table. As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, in this embodiment, the number of random numbers for jackpot determination is 65536. That is, the range of the random number value for jackpot determination is 0 to 65535. As described above, the number of big hit determination values is 10 times higher at the time of high probability than at the time of low probability, but the number of small hit determination values is the same for both low and high probabilities. That is, the number of small hit determination values is the same 59 at both low probability and high probability. Therefore, the small hit probability is the same 0.000902 (1 / 1110.8) for both low and high probabilities. Note that the number of small hit determination values may be increased at the high probability, and the small hit probability may be higher at the high probability.

  When it is determined that the small hit is determined by the small hit determination module (Y in step S65), the decorative symbol information corresponding to the small hit is stored in the decorative symbol information buffer (step S66), and the small hit flag is set. (Step S67). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S68). Although not shown in FIG. 17, when it is determined that a small hit is made, the small hit symbol “4” is automatically determined.

  In step S66, after the decorative symbol information corresponding to the small hit is stored in the decorative symbol information buffer, the decorative symbol command control processing (step S28, FIG. 32) is executed in response to the occurrence of the timer interrupt, and the command set is set. Processing (FIG. 33) is executed, and command transmission processing (FIG. 34) is executed. As a result, a symbol information designation command for designating a small hit (small hit designation command) is transmitted. Detailed contents will be described later.

  When it is determined in the small hit determination module that the small hit is not made (N in step S65), the game control microcomputer 560 reads the random number for symbol determination (one of the display random numbers) from the random number storage buffer. (Step S69) Based on the value of the read out design determining random number, a process of determining a special design out of design is executed (Step S70). One of the symbols “0” to “3”, “8”, and “9” is determined as the special symbol loss symbol.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the decorative symbol information corresponding to the loss in the decorative symbol information buffer (step S71). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S68).

  In step S72 of FIG. 18, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the big hit type determined in step S62 is a probable big hit, and if it is not a probable big hit (N in step S72), the big hit type Without setting the flag indicating that the process proceeds to step S82.

  When the probability variation big hit is found (Y in step S72), the probability variation big hit flag indicating that the probability variation big hit occurs is set (step S73). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation jackpot is a sudden probability variation jackpot (step S74). If it is a sudden probability change big hit (Y in step S74), a sudden probability change flag indicating that a sudden probability change big hit occurs is set (step S75), and the process proceeds to step S82.

  If it is not suddenly a probable big hit (N in Step S74), it is confirmed whether or not a re-lottery effect is executed (Step S76). When the re-lottery effect is not executed (N in step S76), the process proceeds to step S82, and when the re-lottery effect is executed (Y in step S76), the re-drawing effect is executed. A lottery execution flag is set (step S77), and it is confirmed whether the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit (step S78). When the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit (Y in step S78), the big hit execution flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed during the big win is set (step S79), and the process proceeds to step S82. To do. When it is not executed during the big hit (N in Step S78), it is confirmed whether or not the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending (Step S80). When the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending (Y in step S80), an ending execution flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending is set (step S81), and the process proceeds to step S82. . In step S82, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S82).

  20 and 21 are flowcharts showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S201). When the big hit flag is set (Y in step S201), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the sudden probability change flag is set (step S202). If the sudden probability change flag is set (Y in step S202), since sudden probability change big hit will occur, it is decided to use the sudden probability change variation pattern determination table (step S203).

  In the variation pattern determination table for sudden probability variation, variation patterns (variation numbers “104” and “105”) selected at the time of sudden probability variation big hit shown in FIG. 15 are set in advance, and a plurality of judgment values are set for each variation pattern. Is assigned.

  If the probability change flag is not suddenly set (N in step S202), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the probability change big hit flag is set (step S204A). When the probability variation big hit flag is set (Y in step S204A), it is confirmed whether or not the re-lottery execution flag is set (step S204B). When the probability variation jackpot flag is set and the re-lottery execution flag is not set (N in step S204B), a probability variation jackpot that does not execute the re-lottery effect after the big-hit game is started occurs, so the variation pattern for probability variation jackpot It is decided to use the decision table (step S205).

  In the variation pattern determination table for probability variation big hit, variation patterns (variation numbers “43” to “46”, “51” to “76”, “79” selected in advance at the probability variation big hit shown in FIGS. ”To“ 103 ”), and a plurality of determination values are assigned to each variation pattern.

  When the probability variation big hit flag is not set (N in step S204A), since a normal big hit (non-probable variation big hit) occurs, it is decided to use the normal big hit variation pattern determination table (step S206). In addition, although the probability variation jackpot flag is set, if the re-lottery execution flag is also set (Y in step S204B), a probability variation jackpot that executes the re-lottery effect after the big-hit game starts occurs. In this case, since a non-probable variation symbol is derived and displayed when the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped, it is usually necessary to select a variation pattern for jackpot. Therefore, it is determined to use the normal big hit variation pattern determination table (step S206).

  In the normal big hit variation pattern determination table, variation patterns (variation numbers “47” to “70”, “77” to “99”) selected in the normal big hit shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 are set in advance. A plurality of determination values are assigned to each variation pattern.

  The game control microcomputer 560 reads the variation pattern determination random number from the random number storage buffer, and based on the value of the read variation pattern determination random number, sudden variation variation determination table for probability variation, variation pattern determination table for probability variation big hit or normal A symbol variation pattern is determined using the big hit variation pattern determination table (step S207). Specifically, the variation pattern corresponding to the determination value that matches the variation pattern determination random value is determined as the variation pattern of the symbol to be variably displayed next. Then, the process proceeds to step S213.

  If it is determined in step S201 that the big hit flag is not set (N in step S201), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S208). When the small hit flag is set (Y in step S208), since a small hit occurs, it is determined to use the small hit variation pattern determination table (step S209).

  In the variation pattern determination table for small hits, variation patterns (variation numbers “106” and “107”) selected in advance for small hits shown in FIG. 15 are set in advance, and a plurality of determination values are set for each variation pattern. Assigned.

  When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S208), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the chance mode flag indicating that the effect mode is controlled to the chance mode is set. (Step S210). When the chance mode flag is not set (N in step S210), that is, in the normal performance mode, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the time reduction flag is set (step S211A). . When the time reduction flag is not set (N in Step S211A), it is determined to use the normal time deviation variation pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state (Step S211B).

  In the normal time deviation variation pattern determination table, variation patterns (variation numbers “1”, “3” to “42”) selected in advance in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 14 are set in advance. A plurality of judgment values are assigned to the variation pattern.

  On the other hand, when the hour / hour flag is set (Y in step S211A), it is decided to use the hour / hour deviation variation pattern determination table used in the time-short state (step S211C).

  In the change pattern determination table for time shift, a change pattern (variation numbers “2” to “42”) to be selected at the time shift in the time-short state shown in FIG. A plurality of determination values are assigned to each variation pattern.

  In step S210, when the chance mode flag is set (Y in step S210), that is, when the effect mode is the chance mode, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is set. Confirm (step S212A). When the hourly flag is not set (N in Step S212A), it is determined to use the normal mode deviation variation pattern determination table for the chance mode used in the normal gaming state in the chance mode (Step S212B). .

  In the normal mode deviation variation pattern determination table for the chance mode, variation patterns (variation numbers “3” to “42” selected in advance in the normal gaming state during the chance mode shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 are displayed. ”,“ 108 ”), and a plurality of determination values are assigned to each variation pattern.

  On the other hand, when the hour / short flag is set (Y in step S212A), it is decided to use the hour / hour deviation variation pattern determination table for the chance mode used in the time-short state in the chance mode (step S212C). ).

  The variation pattern determination table for the time mode shift for chance mode includes a variation pattern (variation number) selected in advance in the time-short state (including the short state for probability variation) in the chance mode shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 in advance. “3” to “42”, “109”) are set, and a plurality of determination values are assigned to each variation pattern.

  Then, as described above, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the variation pattern determination random number from the random number storage buffer, and based on the read variation pattern determination random number value, the small hit variation pattern determination table, normal time Using the fluctuation pattern determination table for deviation, the fluctuation pattern determination table for deviation at the time reduction, the fluctuation pattern determination table for deviation for the normal time for the chance mode, or the fluctuation pattern determination table for deviation at the time reduction for the chance mode, Is determined (step S207). Then, the process proceeds to step S213.

  In the probability variation state, as in the normal gaming state, the variation pattern determination table for deviation in normal time or the variation pattern determination table for deviation in normal time for chance mode is used during the chance mode. Is determined. In the case of the short time state, the variation pattern is determined by using the shift pattern determination table for shift during the short time or the shift pattern determination table for shift during the chance mode during the chance mode. Is done.

  In step S213, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the variation pattern command data corresponding to the variation pattern determined in step S207 in the variation pattern buffer (step S213). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the variation time in the special symbol process timer (step S214). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the address of the variable command transmission table in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S215). In response to this processing being performed, control for transmitting the variation pattern command is executed in the decorative symbol command control processing (step S28 in FIG. 9, FIG. 32). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a variation number monitoring process (step S216).

  In the fluctuation count monitoring process, the game control microcomputer 560 is changed to a short-time state (except for the short-time state at the time of probability change) after the big hit game ends (when the short-time flag is set), a special symbol after the big hit game ends. The number of fluctuations is counted with a fluctuation number counter. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms whether or not the count value of the fluctuation count counter has reached a value indicating a predetermined fluctuation count (for example, 100) that can continue the short-time state, and the count value is the predetermined fluctuation count. When the value becomes, the hourly flag is reset. As a result, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the big hit game ends becomes a predetermined number of fluctuations, the time-shifted state is shifted to the normal gaming state.

  Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S302) (step S217).

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S302) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, first, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the special symbol process timer by -1 (step S351). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the special symbol process timer has expired (that is, whether or not the value of the special symbol process timer is 0) (step S352), and if it has not expired (N in step S352) ) And the process is terminated. If the special symbol process timer has expired (Y in step S352), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S303) (step S353).

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the game control microcomputer 560 stops the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and derives and displays the stop symbol (step S361). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the decorative symbol stop designation command transmission table in the pointer (step S362), and executes the command setting process (step S363). As a result, control for transmitting a decorative symbol stop designation command is executed.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S364). If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S364), the game control microcomputer 560 stops the jackpot symbol in the jackpot control timer that measures the time for controlling the opening / closing of the jackpot. The time from the display until the big winning opening is released (a big hit display time) is set (step S365). In the jackpot display time, an effect (fanfare effect) for notifying the player that the jackpot game is started is executed.

  Note that different jackpot display times may be set for the big hit of 15 rounds and the big hit of 2 rounds. In this case, for example, the jackpot display time is 3 seconds for a big hit of 15 rounds, and the jackpot display time is 5 seconds for a big hit of two rounds.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the fanfare command transmission table corresponding to the jackpot type to the pointer (step S366), and executes the command setting process (step S367). Thereby, control for transmitting a fanfare command corresponding to the jackpot type is executed. For the big hit type, the probability change big hit flag is set, suddenly the probability change flag is set, the re-draw lotion execution flag is set, the big hit execution flag is set, or the ending execution flag is set It can be confirmed based on whether or not. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S304) (step S368).

  If the big hit flag is not set (N in step S364), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S369). If the small win flag is set (Y in step S369), the game control microcomputer 560 displays the time from when the small winning symbol is stopped displayed to the big prize opening control timer until the big prize opening is released ( The small hit display time) is set (step S370). As described above, the small hit design of the decorative design is the same design as the sudden probability variation design. Further, when the small hit game is started, the same two-round effect as when the sudden probability big hit is started is started.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the small hit fanfare command transmission table in the pointer (step S371), and executes the command setting process (step S372). Thereby, control for transmitting a fanfare command for small hitting is executed. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S308) (step S373).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S369), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S374).

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening in the special symbol process (step S304). In the pre-opening process for the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the big winning opening control timer by 1 (step S401), and confirms whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 ( Step S402). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S402), the processing is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize control timer is 0 (Y in step S402), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the number of big hits is 15 rounds or 2 rounds (step S403). ). If the probability variation jackpot flag is not set, or if the probability variation jackpot flag is set but suddenly the probability variation flag is not set, it can be determined that the round is a big hit of 15 rounds. When the probability variation flag is set, it can be determined that the game is a big hit of two rounds.

  If it is a big hit for 15 rounds (Y in step S403), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the command sending table for the 15 round big hits in the big prize opening opening command pointer to the pointer (step S404), and sets the command. Is executed (step S405). As a result, control for transmitting a 15-round big prize opening opening command for designating the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round) is executed. The number of rounds is recognized by checking the value of a round number counter that counts the number of rounds in the big hit game. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to drive the solenoid 21 to open the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S406). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, and the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the RAM area corresponds to the output state of the output port in step S406. Is set in accordance with the open / close state of the solenoid to be driven. Then, the contents set in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port in the output process of step S32 are output to the output port. As a result, a drive command signal is output from the output port to the solenoid circuit 59. The solenoid circuit 59 outputs a drive signal for driving the solenoid in response to a drive command signal to drive the solenoid. Hereinafter, in the process of opening and closing the solenoid, such an operation is performed.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S407). Since the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 in step S407, in steps S404 and S405, when the value of the round number counter is 0, a command for opening the big prize opening indicating the first round is transmitted. The process of S407 may be executed before the process of step S404, and when the value of the round number counter is 1, a command for opening a big prize opening indicating the first round may be transmitted.

  In addition, the maximum time (15-round round time) that can be opened in each round of the 15 round big hits is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S408). The round time for 15 rounds is, for example, 29.5 seconds. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S414).

  When it is a big hit of two rounds in step S403 (N in step S403), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the command winning table during the big winning opening release command for the two rounds big hit in the pointer (step S409). ), Command set processing is executed (step S410). As a result, a control is executed to transmit a two-round big prize opening opening command for designating a display state corresponding to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the solenoid 21 to release the special winning opening (step S411) and increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S412). Since the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 in step S412, in steps S409 and S410, when the value of the round number counter is 0, a command for opening the big prize opening indicating the first round is transmitted. The process of S412 may be executed before the process of step S409, and when the value of the round number counter is 1, a command for opening a big prize opening indicating the first round may be transmitted.

  In addition, the maximum time for which the big prize opening can be opened in each round in the big hit of two rounds (round time for two rounds) is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S413). The round time for 2 rounds is a short time, for example, 5 seconds. Therefore, in the big hit of two rounds, ten game balls (the maximum number of game balls that can be won) will not win the big prize opening during the round. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S414).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process (step S305) in the special symbol process. In the special winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the special winning prize control timer by -1 (step S421). And it is confirmed whether the number of big hits is 15 rounds (whether it is a big hit of 15 rounds or a big hit of 2 rounds) (step S422).

  If it is a big hit of 15 rounds (Y in step S422), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S423). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S423), it is checked whether or not the game ball has won the big prize opening by checking whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on. Confirmation is made (step S424). If the count switch 23 is not turned on (N in step S424), the process is terminated as it is. If the count switch 23 is on (Y in step S424), the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening (step S425). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S426). If the value of the winning number counter is not the predetermined number (N in step S426), the process is ended as it is.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S423) or when the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S426), the game control microcomputer 560 is Then, the solenoid 21 is driven to control to close the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S427). Then, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (step S428).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the command transmission table after opening the big winning opening for the 15th round big hit to the pointer (step S429), and executes the command setting process (step S430). As a result, control for transmitting a command after opening the big prize opening for 15 rounds that specifies a display state according to the number of rounds after the big prize opening is opened (after the end of the round) is executed.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a time (interval time for 15 rounds) from the end of the round to the start of the next round in the big win of 15 rounds in the big prize opening control timer ( In step S431), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S306) (step S432). The interval time for 15 rounds is, for example, 5 seconds.

  If it is a big hit of two rounds (N in step S422), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the big prize control timer is 0 (step S433), and the value of the big prize control timer If is not 0 (N in step S433), the process is terminated as it is. When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S433), the solenoid 21 is driven to control to close the big prize opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S434).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the display command transmission table after the two-round big winning opening is opened to the pointer (step S435), and executes the command setting process (step S436). As a result, the control for transmitting a command after opening the big winning opening for two rounds for specifying the display state according to the number of rounds after the opening of the big winning opening (after the end of the round) is executed. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the time from the end of the round to the start of the next round (interval time for two rounds) in the big winning prize control timer (two rounds). In step S437), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening post-processing (step S306) (step S432). The interval time for 2 rounds is the same as the interval time for 15 rounds, for example, 5 seconds.

  FIG. 26 and FIG. 27 are flowcharts showing the special winning opening opening post-processing (step S306) in the special symbol process. In the post-opening process for the big prize opening, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by -1 (step S441), and checks whether the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 or not. (Step S442). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S442), the processing is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize control timer is 0 (Y in step S442), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the number of rounds is 15 rounds (15 rounds or 2 rounds Is determined (step S443).

  If it is a big hit of 15 rounds (Y in step S443), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 15 (step S444). If the value of the round number counter is not 15 (N in Step S444), the address of the command transmission table for the 15 round round big prize opening open command transmission table is set in the pointer (Step S445), and the command setting process is executed. (Step S446). As a result, control for transmitting a 15-round big prize opening opening command for designating the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round) is executed. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 controls to open the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) by driving the solenoid 21 (step S447) and increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S448). Since the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 in step S448, the value of the round number counter indicates the number of rounds to be started next minus 1 at the time of the processing of steps S445 and S446. However, if the process of step S448 is executed before the processes of steps S445 and S446, the value of the round number counter indicates the number of rounds to be started next at the time of the processes of steps S445 and S446. Can be.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a round time for 15 rounds in the special winning opening control timer (step S449). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S450).

  If the value of the round counter is 15 (Y in step S444), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the ending command transmission table corresponding to the jackpot type in the pointer (step S451), and sets the command Processing is executed (step S452). Thereby, control for transmitting an ending command corresponding to the jackpot type is executed.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the jackpot end time (execution time of the ending effect) for notifying the player of the end of the jackpot in the jackpot control timer (step S453), and sets the value of the special symbol process flag. The value is updated according to the big hit end process (step S307) (step S454).

  When the big hit end time is set in step S453, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the re-drawing effect is executed during the ending depending on whether the ending execution flag is set, and re-draws during the ending. When the effect is not executed, a shorter time than the case where the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending is set as the jackpot end time (end effect execution time). For example, 10 seconds is set as the execution time of the ending effect that executes the re-lottery effect, and 3 seconds is set as the execution time of the ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect. Thus, when it is not necessary to notify the transition to the probable change state by making the execution time of the ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect shorter than the execution time of the ending effect that executes the re-lottery effect In addition, it is possible to avoid that the production is unnecessarily performed for a long time.

  When it is a big hit of two rounds in step S443 (N in step S443), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 2 (step S455 in FIG. 27). If the value of the round counter is not 2 (N in Step S455), the address of the command transmission table for the 2 round big hit big winning opening is set in the pointer (Step S456), and the command setting process is executed. (Step S457). As a result, a control is executed to transmit a two-round big prize opening opening command for designating a display state corresponding to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the solenoid 21 to release the special winning opening (step S458) and increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S459). Since the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 in step S459, the value of the round number counter indicates the number of rounds to be started next minus 1 at the time of the processing in steps S456 and S457. However, if the process of step S459 is executed before the processes of steps S456 and S457, the value of the round number counter indicates the number of rounds to be started next at the time of the processes of steps S456 and S457. Can be.

  Further, the round time for two rounds is set in the special winning opening control timer (step S460). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S461).

  If the value of the round number counter is 2 (Y in step S455), the game control microcomputer 560 suddenly sets the address of the ending command transmission table for the probability variation big hit in the pointer (step S462), and sets the command. Processing is executed (step S463). As a result, the control for suddenly transmitting the ending command for probability variation big hit is executed. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the jackpot end time in the big prize opening control timer (step S464), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end processing (step S307) (step S307). S465).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the big hit ending process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize winning control timer by -1 (step S471). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S472). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S472), the process is terminated as it is. If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S472), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a game state setting process after the big hit (step S473).

  In the game state setting process after the big hit, the process of setting / resetting the probability variation flag and the short time flag according to the game state after the end of the big hit game is executed. Specifically, when the gaming state shifts to the short-time state after the big hit game ends, only the short-time flag is set, and when the gaming state shifts to the probability change state after the big hit game ends, only the probability change flag is set. When the gaming state is shifted to the probability change time-short state after the game ends, the probability change flag and the time-short flag are set. Further, when the production mode is shifted to the chance mode suddenly after the probable big hit game is over, the chance mode flag is set. Further, when the effect mode is shifted from the chance mode to the normal effect mode after the big hit game is over, the chance mode flag is reset.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 resets the jackpot flag (step S474). If the probability variation jackpot flag is set, the probability variation jackpot flag is reset (step S475), and the sudden probability variation flag is set. In this case, the probability variation flag is suddenly reset (step S476). If the re-lottery execution flag is set, the re-lottery execution flag is reset (step S477). If the big-hit execution flag is set, the big-hit execution is executed. The flag is reset (step S478). Further, if the ending execution flag is set, the ending execution flag is reset (step S479).

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S480).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the small hit release pre-processing (step S308) in the special symbol process. In the small hit release pre-processing, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by 1 (step S501), and checks whether the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step). S502). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S502), the processing is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S502), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 2 (step S503). If the value of the round number counter is not 2 (N in step S503), the solenoid 21 is driven to control to open the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S504), and the value of the round number counter Is incremented by 1 (step S505).

  In addition, the maximum time (the round time for small hits) that the big prize opening can be opened in each round for small hits is set in the big winning prize control timer (step S506). Note that the round time for small hits is the same as the round time for two rounds (for example, 5 seconds). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit releasing process (step S309) (step S507).

  If the value of the round number counter is 2 (Y in step S503), 560 sets a small hit end time for notifying the player of the end of the small hit in the big prize opening control timer (step S508), The value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end processing (step S310) (step S509).

  It should be noted that during the small hit game, the control for transmitting the special winning opening open command is not executed.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the small hit releasing process (step S309) in the special symbol process. In the small hit release process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by -1 (step S511). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S512). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S512), the processing is ended as it is. When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S512), the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to drive the solenoid 21 to close the big prize opening (opening / closing plate 20). (Step S513).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a time from the end of the round to the start of the next round (interval time for small hits) in the small winning of the two rounds in the big prize control timer. (Step S514), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (Step S308) (Step S515). The interval time for small hits is, for example, 5 seconds.

  In addition, during the small hit game, the control for transmitting the command after the big winning opening is opened is not executed.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (step S310) in the special symbol process. In the small hit end process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by -1 (step S531). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S532). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S532), the processing is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S532), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a game state setting process after the small hit (step S533).

  In the after-hit game state setting process, a chance mode flag is set so that the effect mode is shifted to the chance mode after the end of the small-hit game.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 resets the small hit flag (step S534), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S535).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol command control process (step S28). In the decorative symbol command control process, the game control microcomputer 560 loads the decorative symbol command transmission pointer onto the pointer (step S551), and loads the data pointed to by the pointer (step S552). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command (variation pattern command, symbol information designation command, start winning memory designation command) (step S553). At this time, if it is the timing for transmitting the variation pattern command, the address of the variation command transmission table is stored in the decoration symbol command transmission pointer in step S215 of the variation pattern setting processing (step S301) in the special symbol process (step S26). The data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the variable command transmission table. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can determine whether or not it is the timing to transmit the variation pattern command based on whether or not the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the variation command transmission table.

  When it is time to transmit the variation pattern command (Y in step S553), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a command set process (step S554). As a result, control for transmitting the variation pattern command is executed. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the pointer in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S555).

  At this time, in step S572 of the command set process (FIG. 33) executed in step S554, the address of the command transmission table is incremented by 1, so that the address pointed to by the pointer is changed from the address of the variable command transmission table to the symbol information designation command. This is the address of the transmission table. Accordingly, in step S555, the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer.

  In the decorative symbol command control processing when the next timer interrupt occurs (after 2 ms), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the decorative symbol command transmission pointer again to the pointer (step S551), and stores the data pointed to by the pointer. It is loaded (step S552), and it is determined whether it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command (variation pattern command, symbol information designation command, start winning memory designation command) (step S553). At this time, if it is time to transmit the symbol information designation command, in step S555, the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer, and the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table. It has become. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can determine whether or not it is the timing to transmit the symbol information designation command based on whether or not the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table.

  When it is time to transmit the symbol information designation command (Y in step S553), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a command set process (step S554). As a result, control for transmitting a symbol information designation command is executed. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the pointer in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S555).

  At this time, in step S572 of the command set process (FIG. 33) executed in step S554, the address of the command transmission table is incremented by 1, so that the address pointed to by the pointer starts from the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table. This is the address of the storage designation command transmission table. Accordingly, in step S555, the address of the start winning memory designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer.

  In the decorative symbol command control processing when the next timer interrupt occurs (after 2 ms), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the decorative symbol command transmission pointer again to the pointer (step S551), and stores the data pointed to by the pointer. It is loaded (step S552), and it is determined whether it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command (variation pattern command, symbol information designation command, start winning memory designation command) (step S553). At this time, if it is time to transmit the start winning memory designation command, in step S555, the address of the start winning memory designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer, and the data pointed to by the pointer is transmitted to the start winning memory designation command. It is the address of the table. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can determine whether it is the timing to transmit the start winning memory designation command based on whether or not the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the start winning memory designation command transmission table. .

  When it is time to transmit the start winning memory designation command (Y in step S553), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a command set process (step S554). Thereby, control for transmitting the start winning memory designation command is executed. The start prize memory designation command is an effect control command for designating (notifying) the current start prize memory number (holding memory number). The start prize memory number is confirmed in the storage process (step S33), and The number is set as a value designated by the start winning memory designation command. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the pointer in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S555).

  In this case, when the address of the command transmission table is incremented by 1 in step S572 of the command set process (FIG. 33) executed in step S554, the command transmission table for transmitting the decorative symbol command by the address pointed to by the pointer. The address is not shown. Accordingly, in the decorative symbol command control process when the next timer interrupt occurs (after 2 ms), the decorative symbol command transmission pointer is loaded again into the pointer (step S551), and the data pointed to by the pointer is loaded (step S552). Whether or not it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command is determined (step S553), but it is determined in step S553 that it is not the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing command set processing. As described above, the command set process is executed in steps S56, S363, S367, S372, S405, S410, S430, S436, S446, S452, S457, S463, and S554. The command set process is a process including a command output process and an INT signal output process.

  In the command set process, the game control microcomputer 560 first loads the command data 1 pointed to by the address in the command transmission table (step S561), and executes (calls) the command transmission process shown in FIG. 34 (step S562). .

  In the command transmission process shown in FIG. 34, the game control microcomputer 560 first outputs a transmission command (effect control command) to the output port 1 (step S581). As a result, the MODE data of the first byte in the production control command having a 2-byte structure is output from the output port 1.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the effect control signal INT output bit in the port buffer (step S582), and loads the port 2 buffer (step S583). In this embodiment, for example, “1” is set in the port buffer as an effect control signal INT output bit, and data “0” in the port 2 buffer is loaded. Then, the logical sum of the port 2 buffer and the port buffer is calculated (step S584), and the calculation result is output to the output port 2 (step S585). In this embodiment, when the calculation result is “1”, an on-state (high level) effect control INT signal is output from the output port 2. In response to the output of the on-state effect control INT signal, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a process of receiving (capturing) a transmission command.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a predetermined value in the wait counter (step S586), and subtracts one by one until the value becomes 0 (steps S587, S588). This process is a process for setting the ON period (high level period) of the effect control INT signal. When the value of the wait counter becomes 0 (Y in step S588), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the port 2 buffer (step S589) and outputs the port 2 buffer to the output port 2 (step S590). As a result, an effect control INT signal in the off state (low level) is output from the output port 2.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a predetermined value in the wait counter (step S591), and subtracts one by one until the value becomes 0 (steps S592, S593). This process is a process for setting the off period (low level period) of the effect control INT signal. When the value of the wait counter becomes 0 (Y in step S593), the process returns to the command set process in FIG.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 33, the game control microcomputer 560 adds 1 to the address of the command transmission table (step S563). Then, the address of the command transmission table is saved in the stack or the like (step S564).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 tests the work area reference designation bit (bit 7) of the command data 2 (step S565), and determines whether or not the value of the work area reference designation bit of the command data 2 is “0”. Is determined (step S566). If it is not 0 (N in step S566), the head address of the command extended data address table is set in the pointer (step S567), and the address is calculated by adding the value of bit 6 to bit 0 of the command data 2 to the pointer. (Step S568). Then, the data (command extension data) in the area pointed to by the address (pointer) is loaded (step S569).

  In the command extended data address table, EXT data (second byte data in a 2-byte effect control command) that can be sent to the effect control microcomputer 100 is sequentially set. Therefore, if the value of the work area reference designation bit is “1” by the above processing, the EXT data in the command extended data address table corresponding to the contents of the command data 2 is loaded, and the value of the work area reference designation bit is If "0", the contents of the command data 2 are loaded as they are. Even when EXT data is read from the command extension data address table, bit 7 of the data is “0”.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 executes (calls) a command transmission processing routine (step S570). Accordingly, the EXT data and the effect control INT signal are transmitted at the same timing as the transmission of the MODE data by the processing shown in FIG. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 restores the address of the command transmission table (step S571), and adds 1 to the address of the command transmission table (step S572). When the address of the command transmission table is incremented by 1, if the address is the address of the command transmission table for transmitting the decorative symbol command, as described above, the decorative symbol command control process performs the decorative symbol command control processing. If the transmission process (command set process) is executed and the address is not the address of the command transmission table for transmitting the decorative symbol command, the decorative symbol command transmission process (command set process) is not executed in the decorative symbol command control process.

  As described above, the production control command having a 2-byte structure is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. In the effect control microcomputer 100, when the rising of the effect control INT signal as the capture signal is detected, the effect control command capturing process is started. Before the capture process is completed, the game control microcomputer 560 A new signal is not output to the signal line. That is, reliable command reception processing is performed in the production control microcomputer 100. The effect control microcomputer 100 may start the effect control command capturing process at the fall of the effect control INT signal. Also, the polarity of the effect control INT signal may be reversed (it may be at a low level when instructing command capture).

  Next, the transmission timing of each effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described.

  FIG. 35 is a timing diagram showing the transmission timing of the effect control command when the 15-round jackpot game is executed. As shown in FIG. 35, every time a start winning occurs and variable symbol display is started on the special symbol display 8, the background designation command corresponding to the gaming state is displayed in the special symbol normal processing (step S300). Is sent. Also, in the special symbol normal process (step S300), the type of big hit is determined when it is out of place, big hit, small hit or big hit. In the variation pattern setting process (step S301), the variation pattern is determined, and a variation pattern command designating the determined variation pattern is transmitted in the decorative symbol command control process (step S28). Subsequently, in the decorative symbol command control process (step S28), a symbol information designation command corresponding to the losing, big hit (big hit type) and small hit determined in the special symbol normal process is transmitted, and further, a start winning memory designation command is sent. (The start winning memory designation command at this time is a command indicating that the start winning memory number has been decremented by -1 due to the start of fluctuation). In the example shown in FIG. 35, an effect control command for designating a big hit variation pattern is transmitted as the variation pattern command, and an effect control command for designating 15 rounds of big hit as the symbol information designation command (suddenly probable big hit and small hits). It is assumed that an effect control command other than a command for designating is transmitted. Then, the special symbol variation time is measured in the special symbol variation processing (step S302).

  In the effect control microcomputer 100, the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560 is a variation pattern dedicated to outliers, a variation pattern dedicated to probability big hit, a variation pattern dedicated to normal big hit, a variation pattern dedicated to sudden probability big hit, small If the variation pattern command indicates a variation pattern dedicated to the hit, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9 is determined based on the command. On the other hand, if the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560 is a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern for both normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot, the variable display device 9 uses the symbol information designation command received thereafter. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol to be stopped is determined.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the variation of the decorative pattern in the variable display device 9 based on the reception of the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In addition, when the execution of the re-lottery effect is designated by the received variation pattern command, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the re-lottery effect during the variable display of the decorative symbols on the variable display device 9.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether it is a loss or a big hit or a small hit based on the symbol information designation command from the game control microcomputer 560. The presence / absence of execution and the execution timing are also confirmed.

  In the special symbol stop process (step S303), when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, a decorative symbol stop designation command is transmitted. When receiving the decoration design stop designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 derives and displays the already-decorated stop design of the design.

  If the stop symbol of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, a fanfare command corresponding to the jackpot type is transmitted in the special symbol stop process (step S303). Based on the fanfare command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a fanfare effect informing the start of the big hit game on the variable display device 9.

  In the big prize opening pre-processing (step S304), when the jackpot display time elapses, the big prize opening is opened, and a 15-round big prize opening opening command for designating the first round display is transmitted. The The production control microcomputer 100 displays the round display of the first round on the variable display device 9 based on the command for opening the big prize opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  When the round time elapses in the process for opening the special prize opening (step S305), the special prize opening is closed, and a command for opening the big prize opening for 15 rounds specifying the interval display after the first round is transmitted. The The production control microcomputer 100 displays an interval display on the variable display device 9 until the next round (second round) is started based on the command after the big winning opening is opened from the game control microcomputer 560.

  When the interval time elapses in the post-opening process for the special winning opening (step S306), the special winning opening is opened and a command for opening the special winning opening for 15 rounds specifying the round display of the second round is transmitted. . The production control microcomputer 100 displays the round display of the second round on the variable display device 9 based on the command for opening the big prize opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  By repeatedly executing the process during opening of the special winning opening and the process after opening the special winning opening as described above, the round display of each round and the interval display between rounds are displayed, and the round advances in order. In the special symbol normal process (step S300), when it is determined that the re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big hit game, it is re-executed during a predetermined round (in the 15th round in the example of FIG. 35). A lottery effect is executed.

  In the fifteenth round winning opening opening post-process (step S306), when the interval time has elapsed, an ending command corresponding to the jackpot type is transmitted. On the basis of the ending command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes an ending effect informing that the jackpot game has ended on the variable display device 9. In the special symbol normal process (step S300), when it is determined to execute the re-lottery effect during the ending, the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending (in the ending effect). In the example shown in FIG. 35, the re-lottery effect is also executed in the ending effect. The re-lottery effect may be executed a plurality of times after the big hit game is started, but in this embodiment, when the re-lottery effect is executed after the big hit game is started, it is always promoted to a probable big hit. It will be executed only once. Therefore, when the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, the re-lottery effect is not executed during the ending.

  Thereafter, in the big hit end process (step S307), when the big hit end time has elapsed, after the big hit game state setting process etc. is executed, the process returns to the special symbol normal process (step S300) again, and the special symbol change starts. Is done.

  FIG. 36 is a timing chart showing the transmission timing of the effect control command when the two-round big hit game (sudden probability change big hit game) and the small hit game are executed. As in the case shown in FIG. 35, every time a start winning occurs and variable symbol display is started on the special symbol display 8, the special symbol normal process (step S300) is performed according to the gaming state. A background specification command is sent. Also, in the special symbol normal process (step S300), the type of big hit is determined when it is out of place, big hit, small hit or big hit. In the variation pattern setting process (step S301), the variation pattern is determined, and a variation pattern command designating the determined variation pattern is transmitted in the decorative symbol command control process (step S28). Subsequently, in the decorative symbol command control process (step S28), a symbol information designation command corresponding to the losing, big hit (big hit type) and small hit determined in the special symbol normal process is transmitted, and further, a start winning memory designation command is sent. Is sent. In the example shown in FIG. 36, an effect control command that designates a variation pattern for sudden probability change or small hit as a variation pattern command is transmitted, and an effect control command that designates sudden probability change big hit or small hit as a symbol information designation command. Is sent. Then, the special symbol variation time is measured in the special symbol variation processing (step S302).

  If the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560 is a variation pattern command that indicates a variation pattern dedicated to a sudden probability variation big hit, the effect control microcomputer 100 stops and displays on the variable display device 9 based on the command. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined. Further, if the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560 is a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern dedicated to small hits / big hits, the production control microcomputer 100 stops at the variable display device 9 based on the command. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol to be displayed is determined.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the variation of the decorative pattern in the variable display device 9 based on the reception of the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560. Furthermore, the production control microcomputer 100 suddenly confirms the probability change big hit or the small hit based on the symbol information designation command from the game control microcomputer 560. It should be noted that the re-lottery effect is not executed in the case of suddenly big hits and small hits.

  In the special symbol stop process (step S303), when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, a decorative symbol stop designation command is transmitted. When receiving the decoration design stop designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 derives and displays the already-decorated stop design of the design.

  If the special symbol stop symbol is a sudden probability variation symbol, a fanfare command designating the start of sudden probability variation jackpot is transmitted in the special symbol suspension process (step S303). If the stop symbol of the special symbol is a small hit symbol, a fanfare command designating the start of a small hit is transmitted in the special symbol stop process (step S303). The production control microcomputer 100 suddenly starts a probability change big hit game or a small hit game based on the fanfare command from the game control microcomputer 560. Note that when a probable big hit game or a small hit game is suddenly started, a two-round effect is executed. The effect for two rounds is a series of special effects that are executed from the start to the end of the sudden change big hit game or the small hit game. For example, when a probability variation symbol or a small hit symbol is suddenly stopped as a decorative symbol stop symbol, a special two-round effect such as a character appearing or a movie image is suddenly started. When the two-round production ends, the production mode shifts to a chance mode in which the transition of the probability change state is expected.

  When the probability change big hit game is suddenly started, in the big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S304), when the big winning display time elapses, the big winning opening is opened and the display state at the first round is designated. A command for opening a big prize opening for two rounds is sent. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the command for opening the big prize opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  When the round time elapses in the process for opening the big prize opening (step S305), the big prize opening is closed, and a command after opening the big prize opening for two rounds that specifies the display state after the first round is transmitted. Is done. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for the two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the command after the special winning opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In the post-opening process for the big winning opening (step S306), when the interval time elapses, the big winning opening is opened, and a two-round big winning big opening opening command specifying the display state at the second round is issued. Sent. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the command for opening the big prize opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In the second round big opening opening process (step S305), when the round time elapses, the big winning opening is closed and the big winning opening for two rounds big hit that specifies the display state after the second round is designated. A command is sent after release. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for the two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the command after the special winning opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In the post-opening process for the special winning opening after the second round (step S306), when the interval time elapses, an ending command for designating the end of the sudden probability change big hit is transmitted. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the ending command from the game control microcomputer 560.

  Thereafter, in the big hit end process (step S307), when the big hit end time has elapsed, after the big hit game state setting process etc. is executed, the process returns to the special symbol normal process (step S300) again, and the special symbol change starts. Is done.

  When the small hit game is started, the big winning opening is opened when the small hit display time has elapsed in the small hit release pre-processing (step S308).

  In the small hit opening process (step S309), when the round time elapses, the big prize opening is closed.

  In the pre-opening process for small hits after the first round (step S308), when the interval time elapses, the big winning opening is opened.

  In the second round small hit opening process (step S309), when the round time elapses, the big prize opening is closed.

  In the pre-opening process for small hits after the second round (step S308), when the interval time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the small hitting end process.

  Thereafter, in the small hit end processing (step S310), when the small hit end time has elapsed, after the small hit end game state setting processing or the like is executed, the processing returns to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) again to return the special symbol. Variation starts.

  In addition, during the round in the small hit game (similarly in the sudden probability change big hit game), the opening time (round time) of the big prize opening is short. For this reason, since 10 game balls do not win the big winning opening, the big winning opening is not closed within the round time. Accordingly, since the time from the start to the end of the game is constant, the display control state of the effect for two rounds is not based on the presentation control microcomputer 100 receiving the command for opening the big prize opening or the command after opening the big prize opening. Can be switched. Therefore, in the small hit game, the game control microcomputer 560 does not perform the process of transmitting the special winning opening opening command or the special winning opening open command. Note that even in the case of a sudden probability big hit, the game control microcomputer 560 may not perform the process of transmitting the command for opening the big prize opening or the command after opening the big prize opening.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80. The production control microcomputer 100 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the start interval of the effect control processing (step S701). Thereafter, the effect control microcomputer 100 proceeds to a loop process for confirming the monitoring of the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interruption occurs, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a timer interruption flag in the timer interruption process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control microcomputer 100 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first analyzes the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the variable display device 9 is executed. In addition, various random numbers for determining the stop pattern of decorative symbols (random numbers for determining left symbols, random numbers for determining right symbols, random numbers for determining middle symbols, random numbers for determining reach, extracted by reach loss determination processing) A random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a reach design determination random number or the like is executed (step S706). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  38 to 40 are flowcharts showing the command analysis process (step S704) in the main process. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is stored in the command reception buffer. In the command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control microcomputer 100 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (background specifying command: 9500 (H) to 9503 (H)) for specifying the background in the variable display device 9 (Y in step S613), the effect control microcomputer 100 is used. Confirms the gaming state based on the content of the background designation command, and sets the confirmed gaming state in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S614). And the control which displays the background image according to a game state on the variable display apparatus 9 is performed (step S615).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (variation pattern command: 8000 (H) to 806C (H)) for designating a change pattern (step S616), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the command EXT. Data is stored in the fluctuation pattern data storage area in the RAM (step S617), and a fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (step S618). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command is a variation pattern command for specifying a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit (step S619), and a variation pattern for both common big hit / probable variation big hit. If it is not a variation pattern command for designating (N in step S619), the first decorative symbol determination process is executed (step S620). The detailed contents of the first decorative symbol determination process will be described later (see FIG. 41). If the variation pattern command designates a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit (Y in step S619), a common flag indicating that the variation pattern is for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit is set (step S621).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (design information designation command: 8C00 (H) to 8C06 (H)) that designates symbol information (Y in step S623), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the symbol control command. A symbol information command reception flag indicating that the information designation command has been received is set (step S624). And it is confirmed whether the stop symbol of a decoration symbol has already been determined (step S625A). Here, if the variation pattern command is not a command for designating a variation pattern for both normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot, the stop symbol of the decoration symbol has already been determined in the first decoration symbol determination process. Therefore, it can be confirmed whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol has already been determined depending on whether or not the dual-purpose flag is set.

  If the decorative symbol stop symbol has not yet been determined (N in step S625A), the production control microcomputer 100 executes a second decorative symbol determination process (step S626). The detailed contents of the second decorative symbol determination process will be described later (see FIGS. 113 and 114). When the decorative symbol stop symbol has already been determined (Y in step S625A), the production control microcomputer 100 executes the redrawing effect after the symbol information designation command is a big hit, and promotes the non-probable variable symbol to the probabilistic symbol. It is confirmed whether it is a command for designating, that is, a command for specifying 2 per probability variation (8C03 (H)) or a command for specifying 3 per probability variation (8C04 (H)) (step S625B). If it is a symbol information designation command that designates promotion after a big win (Y in step S625B), the production control microcomputer 100 sets a re-lottery effect execution flag indicating that a re-lottery effect is executed after the big win ( Step S625C). If it is a command with 2 probable big hits, a re-lottery effect execution flag is set to indicate that a re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big win. Set an ending re-lottery effect execution flag indicating that this is to be done. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S625D), and determines and stores a probability variation symbol using the probability variation symbol selection table shown in FIG. 103 in accordance with the extracted random number value (step S625D). S625E). The probability variation symbol determined in this way is a probability variation symbol derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect executed after the big hit game is started. The contents of the probability variation symbol selection table will be described later.

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (start winning memory designation command: C0XX (H)) that designates the starting winning memory number (Y in step S627), the start winning memory display control process is executed (step S627). S628). The start winning memory display control process is a process of performing control for displaying a display (start winning memory display) that can specify the start winning memory number in a predetermined area of the variable display device 9. In this process, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms the number of start winning memories based on the start winning memory designation command, and displays the confirmed number of start winning memories on the variable display device 9.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the start prize memory designation command is a start prize memory designation command for designating the start prize memory number -1 transmitted at the start of variation, that is, in the decorative symbol command control process. It is determined whether the start winning memory designation command is transmitted next to the symbol information designation command (step S629). Here, whether or not it is a start prize memory designation command for designating the start prize memory number −1, for example, in the start prize memory display control process, the start prize memory number designated by the start prize memory designation command is stored. The determination can be made by checking whether or not the number of start winning memories specified by the next received start winning memory specifying command is -1. If it is not the start winning memory designation command for designating the starting winning memory number −1 (N in Step S629), the process returns to Step S611. If it is the start winning memory designation command for designating the starting winning memory number −1 (Y in step S629), the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the symbol information command reception flag is set (step S630). If the flag is set (Y in step S630), it means that the symbol information designation command has been successfully received before the start winning memory designation command, and the process returns to step S611.

  If the symbol information command reception flag is not set (N in step S630), it indicates that the symbol information designation command has not been normally received before the start winning memory designation command. That is, it means that the symbol information designation command is missed in the production control microcomputer 100. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the decorative symbol stop symbol has already been determined in step S620 (step S631), and if it has already been determined (Y in step S631), the step S611 is performed. Return to processing. If the decorative symbol stop symbol has not yet been determined (N in step S631), a provisionally determined symbol determination process is executed (step S632). The tentatively determined symbol determining process is a process of tentatively determining a non-probable variable symbol when a variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probable variable jackpot is received but a symbol information designation command is missed. The detailed contents of the temporary determination symbol determination process will be described later (see FIG. 120).

  In addition to the case where the symbol information designation command is missed, the symbol information designation command is not completely received, that is, the MODE information and the EXT data of the symbol information designation command cannot be received. Also included is a case where a command that is garbled data or the like and is not a symbol information designation command is received. For example, when the MODE data of the symbol information designation command is garbled, a command that is not a symbol information designation command (including a command that cannot be recognized by the production control microcomputer 100) is received, or the symbol information designation command EXT is received. This is the case, for example, when an EXT data command (see FIG. 12) that is not defined as a symbol information designation command is received because the data is garbled.

  The EXT data of the symbol information specifying command is garbled. However, when a command defined as the symbol information specifying command is received, the symbol information specifying command which is a symbol information specifying command but is inconsistent in the control processing is displayed. It will be received. In this case, when the production control microcomputer 100 recognizes that the symbol information designation command has been received, the symbol information command reception flag is set (step S624), and the flag setting is confirmed in step S630 (step S624). There is a possibility that the provisionally determined symbol determination process is not executed (Y in S630) (step S632). However, if the garbled symbol information designation command is a command other than the normal jackpot designation command (8C01 (H)) or the probability variation jackpot designation command (8C02 (H) to 8C04 (H)), the decorative symbol is still determined. However, it is possible to determine that the variation pattern command and the symbol information specifying command are not consistent with each other by receiving such a symbol information specifying command (N in step S631). Therefore, in such a case, it is preferable to execute the temporary determination symbol determination process (step S632).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (fanfare command: A000 (H) to A004 (H), A600 (H)) that specifies the start of a big hit or a small hit (fanfare) (Y in step S633). The production control microcomputer 100 sets a fanfare reception flag corresponding to the content of the fanfare command (step S634). For example, depending on the contents of the fanfare command (such as the type of jackpot), a fanfare reception flag indicating the start of a normal jackpot, a fanfare reception flag indicating the start of a promiscuous jackpot (no redrawing effect), a promising big hit (a redrawing effect during a jackpot) Fanfare reception flag indicating the start of execution), fanfare reception flag indicating the start of probability variation big hit (execution of re-draw lottery with ending), fanfare reception flag indicating the start of sudden probability variation big hit, fanfare reception flag indicating the start of small hit To do.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not a command non-reception flag indicating that the symbol information designation command has not been received is set (step S635). The command non-reception flag is set in the temporary determination symbol determination process (see step S632B in FIG. 120). At this time, if the command not received flag is set, it means that a variation pattern command for both normal big hit / probable big hit has been received, but the symbol information designation command has not been received normally, and whether it is a probable big hit or normal big hit. This means that the decorative symbol stop symbol (big hit symbol) has not been determined.

  When the command non-reception flag is not set (N of step S635), the process returns to step S611. When the command non-reception flag is set (Y in step S635), it is confirmed whether or not the big hit is a probable big hit based on the fanfare reception flag or the like (step S636). If it is not a probable big hit (N in step S636), the process returns to step S611. If it is a probable big hit (Y in step S636), the production control microcomputer 100 executes a second probable symbol determination process for determining a probable symbol as a decorative symbol stop symbol (step S637). Detailed contents of the second probability variation design determination process will be described later (see FIG. 121). The probability variation symbol determined and stored in the second probability variation symbol determination process is derived from the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game when the command unreceived flag is set (when the symbol information designation command is not yet received). It is a stop symbol of the decorative symbol to be displayed.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not it is necessary to execute the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game based on the fanfare reception flag (step S638). Even if it is not necessary to execute the re-lottery effect, that is, even if the fanfare command designating the execution of the re-lottery effect is not received during the big hit or the ending (N in step S638), the re-lottery effect is performed. Must be executed. This is because when a variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probable variation jackpot is received but no symbol information designation command is received, a non-probable variation symbol is determined as a temporary jackpot symbol in the provisional symbol determination process (see FIG. 120). ), Since the non-probable variation symbol has already been derived and displayed, if the true jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot (excluding sudden probability variation jackpots), the probability variation symbol is re-established so as not to disadvantage the player. This is because it is necessary to derive and display the lottery effect. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts an execution timing determination random number (step S639), and determines the execution timing of the re-lottery effect according to the extracted execution timing determination random number (step S640). Then, a re-lottery execution flag corresponding to the determined execution timing is set (step S642). Specifically, when it is determined that the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, the re-lottery execution flag during the big hit is set, and when it is determined that the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending, A lottery execution flag is set.

  If it is determined in step S640 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed in the ending, the symbol information designating command is not actually executed in the ending, but the symbol information designation command is the microcomputer 100 for effect control. Since it was not received at ending, it was necessary to execute a re-lottery effect at the ending. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may execute an ending effect for when the symbol information designation command is not received (an ending effect of 3 seconds for executing the re-lottery effect). In this embodiment, since the execution time of the ending effect for executing the re-lottery effect is 10 seconds and the execution time of the ending effect for which the re-lottery effect is not executed is 3 seconds, the re-lottery effect is executed by ending in step S640. If it is decided to do so, an ending effect with an execution time of 10 seconds will be executed. However, if an ending effect with an execution time of 10 seconds is executed when no symbol information designation command has been received, the game control micro This is because the control timing on the computer 560 side does not match. Also, in order to synchronize the execution time of the ending effect between the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100, the ending is not determined as the execution timing of the re-lottery effect in step S640 (always the re-lottery). It is also possible to determine that a big hit is made as the execution timing of the production).

  On the other hand, if it is necessary to execute a re-lottery effect, that is, if a fanfare command specifying execution of the re-lottery effect is received during a big hit or ending (Y in step S638), it is specified by the fanfare command. The timing is determined as the re-lottery effect execution timing (step S641). Then, a re-lottery execution flag corresponding to the determined execution timing is set (step S642).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (ending command: A301 (H) to A305 (H)) for designating the end of the jackpot (ending) (Y in step S643), the effect control microcomputer 100 has The ending reception flag corresponding to the content of the ending command is set (step S644). For example, depending on the content of the ending command (such as jackpot type), an ending reception flag indicating the end of a normal jackpot, an ending reception flag indicating the end of a promiscuous jackpot (no re-drawing effect), a promising big hit (re-drawing effect during a jackpot) An ending reception flag indicating the end of execution), an ending reception flag indicating the end of probability variation jackpot (execution of re-lottery effect by ending), and an ending reception flag indicating the end of sudden probability variation jackpot.

  If the received command read in step S612 is another effect control command, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a flag corresponding to the received command (step S645).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the first decorative symbol determination process (step S620). In the first decorative symbol determination process, when the received variation pattern command is a variation pattern command dedicated to a disconnection (Y in step S651), a disconnection determination flag indicating that the disconnection has been determined is set (step S652). ), Whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern with reach is checked (step S653). If it is not a variation pattern with reach (N in step S653), the production control microcomputer 100 executes a reach-less loss determination process (step S654). The detailed contents of the reach-less losing determination process will be described later (see FIG. 42).

  If it is a variation pattern with reach (Y in step S653), the production control microcomputer 100 executes reach determination loss determination processing (step S655). The detailed contents of the reach loss determination process will be described later (see FIG. 60).

  When the variation pattern command is not the only variation pattern command for outliers (N in step S651) but is the variation pattern command dedicated to the probability variation big hit (Y in step S656), the production control microcomputer 100 indicates that the probability variation big hit has been determined. A probability variation big hit determination flag is set (step S657). Then, a first probability variation design determination process is executed (step S658). The detailed contents of the first probability variation design determination process will be described later (see FIG. 101).

  If the fluctuation pattern command is not for the probability variable big hit only (N in Step S656) but is the normal big hit special (Y in Step S659), the production control microcomputer 100 confirms that the normal big hit has been determined. The normal big hit determination flag shown is set (step S660). Then, an uncertain variable symbol determination process is executed (step S661). The detailed contents of the non-probable variable symbol determination process will be described later (see FIG. 102).

  When the variation pattern command is not for the normal big hit only (N in Step S659) but for the sudden probability change big hit (Y in Step S662), the effect control microcomputer 100 has determined the sudden probability variation big hit. A sudden probability variation big hit determination flag indicating that is set (step S663). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 suddenly determines and stores the decorative symbol stop symbol as the probability variation symbol “summer winter spring” (step S664). If it is not a variation pattern command dedicated to sudden change big hit (N in step S662) but a variation pattern dedicated to small hit, the production control microcomputer 100 displays a small hit determination flag indicating that the small hit has been determined. Set (step S665). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the decorative symbol stop symbol as the small hit symbol “summer winter spring” (step S666). As described above, in this embodiment, the sudden probability variation symbol and the small hit symbol are the same one type of symbol (see FIG. 5).

  FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing reachless losing determination processing (step S654). In the reachless losing determination process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the current production mode is the chance mode (step S1001). Whether or not the current production mode is the chance mode is determined by checking whether or not a chance mode flag indicating that the production mode is in the chance mode is set. The chance mode flag is set when, for example, a chance state background designation command (9503 (H)) is received as a background designation command, and is reset when a command other than the chance state background designation command is received during the chance mode. (Refer to step S614). Alternatively, the value is set when the probability change big hit or the small hit ends suddenly, and reset when the chance mode end condition is satisfied (for example, when a big hit occurs during the chance mode and the big hit ends) (step S807). , S808).

  When the effect mode is not the chance mode but the normal effect mode (N in Step S1001), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a left symbol determining random number (Step S1002). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the left symbol of the off symbol using the left symbol selection table (FIG. 43, FIG. 49, FIG. 50, FIG. 51) according to the extracted random number value (step S1003). ). In the left symbol selection table, as shown in FIGS. 43, 49, 50, and 51, a plurality of determination values are assigned to each left symbol substantially equally. The number associated with each left symbol indicates the number of assigned judgment values. The total number of assigned determination values is the same as the number (range) of random values to be updated. “/ 107” indicates that the number of random values is 107 (0 to 106). This also applies to other tables (for example, “/ 73” indicates that the number of random values is 73 (0 to 72)). The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value as the left symbol. The determined left symbol is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM.

  In this embodiment, the random number for determining the left symbol (left symbol determining random number) extracted in step S1002 of the reach-less losing determination process is referred to as a first symbol random number (first identification information random number).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a right symbol determining random number (step S1004). Then, the right symbol addition value determination table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected (step S1005). Specifically, if the variation pattern of “normal variation” (8000 (H)) or the variation pattern of “normal variation at short time” (8001 (H)) is selected, the right symbol addition value determination table shown in FIG. 43 is selected. To do. Also, if the fluctuation pattern (8002 (H)) of “two-frame sliding gaze” is selected, the right symbol addition value determination table shown in FIG. 49 is selected. Further, if the variation pattern of “3-frame sliding gas” (8003 (H)) is selected, the right symbol addition value determination table shown in FIG. 50 is selected. Also, if the variation pattern of “4-frame sliding gaze” (8004 (H), 8005 (H)) is selected, the right symbol addition value determination table shown in FIG. 51 is selected.

  Here, “○ frame sliding gaze” is a variation pattern in which the right symbol temporarily stops after the left symbol stops, and then the right symbol slides a predetermined number of frames and stops. In “○ Top Slide Gase”, when the right symbol slips and stops, it does not become the same symbol as the left symbol (reach is not established), but in “○ Top Slide” described later, the right symbol slips and stops. Sometimes the same symbol as the left symbol (reach is established).

  In the right symbol addition value determination table, “addition value” is the value of the symbol number added to the left symbol determined in step S1003. For example, if the determined left symbol is “1” and the added value is “3”, the right symbol is determined as “four”. Note that, in the case of the variation pattern of “○ frame sliding gaze”, the right symbol to be temporarily stopped is determined using the right symbol addition value determination tables of FIGS. 49 to 51. For example, if the determined left symbol is “1” and the added value is “9”, the temporarily stopped right symbol is “summer”, and the right symbol that is derived and displayed is a variation pattern. The symbol is a symbol obtained by further adding “circle” (“winter” in which two frames are added to “summer” if two frames are slipped).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the right symbol of the off symbol using the right symbol addition value determination table selected in step S1005 according to the random value extracted in step S1004 (step S1006). As shown in FIG. 43, FIG. 49, FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, in the right symbol addition value determination table, in principle, a plurality of determination values are assigned to each addition value. However, no determination value is assigned to the added value “0”. This is because the reach is established when the right symbol of the added value “0” is determined. In addition, when a slip gaze effect (an effect in which the right symbol slips a predetermined number of frames after the left symbol stops and the right symbol stops) is executed, the right symbol that is likely to reach is selected. Further, as shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, determination values are assigned to addition values such as “1”, “9”, “10”, and “11”. On the other hand, no judgment value is assigned to the added value corresponding to the number of sliding frames of the right design. For example, in the right symbol addition value determination table of “3-frame sliding gaze” shown in FIG. 50, no determination value is assigned to the addition value “9”. This is because if the left symbol is “1” and the added value is “9”, the right symbol is “summer”, but if “summer” becomes “one” due to a three-frame slide, reach will be established. . The production control microcomputer 100 selects the right symbol addition value determination table in step S1005, determines an addition value for the left symbol that matches the random number extracted in step S1004, and uses the determined addition value as the symbol number of the left symbol. The right symbol of the symbol number added to is determined, and the determined right symbol is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM.

  In this embodiment, the random number for determining the addition value for the left symbol extracted in step S1004 of the reach-less losing determination process (the right symbol determining random number) is referred to as the second symbol random number (second identification information random number). As shown in FIGS. 43, 49, 50 and 51, the second symbol random number is “/ 73”, that is, the number of random numbers is 0 to 72, and the first symbol random number “/ 107” is Are different random numbers.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1007). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the determined left and right symbols are a chance-forbidden pattern (an arrangement pattern of a left symbol and a right symbol that can cause a chance eye) (step S1008).

  As described above, in this embodiment, in order to avoid misunderstanding that the chance eye is derived and displayed when the outlier symbol is derived and displayed, in this embodiment, the chance eye (chance eye A, chance eye B, and sudden use The control is executed to prohibit the derivation and display of the same symbol as the chance symbol (sudden probability variation symbol) and the small hit chance symbol (small symbol) as a symbol. Here, when it falls under the chance eye prohibition pattern, a chance eye may occur. For example, when the left symbol is “seven” and the right symbol is “summer”, a chance (1C) shown in FIG. 3 may occur. In this case, it is necessary not to determine “spring” as a middle symbol so as not to be a chance. Therefore, when it is determined in step S1008 that it corresponds to the chance eye prohibition pattern (Y in step S1008), the medium symbol addition value determination table for the chance eye prohibition rule is used (step S1011). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1008 that the pattern does not correspond to the chance eye prohibition pattern (N in step S1008), the normal medium symbol addition value determination table that is not for the chance eye prohibition pattern is used (step S1009).

  In step S1009, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a middle symbol addition value determination table corresponding to the right symbol addition value determined in step S1006 (step S1009). As a middle symbol addition value determination table corresponding to the right symbol addition value, as shown in FIGS. 44 to 46, tables when the right symbol addition value is “1” to “11” are prepared. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol of the off symbol using the middle symbol addition value determination table selected in step S1009 according to the random value extracted in step S1007 (step S1010).

  In the middle symbol addition value determination table corresponding to the right symbol addition values shown in FIGS. 44 to 46, the middle symbol addition value (addition value “0”) for the right symbol such that the middle symbol is the same as the right symbol. Determination values are not allocated (that is, the number of determination values to be allocated is 0). In addition, a determination value is not assigned to the addition value of the middle symbol for the right symbol so that the middle symbol becomes the same as the left symbol (that is, the number of determination values to be allocated is 0). For example, in the middle symbol addition value determination table when the right symbol addition value shown in FIG. 44 is “1”, no determination value is assigned to the addition value “11” for the right symbol. This is due to the following reason.

  In the normal production mode, the left symbol stops, the right symbol stops, and then the middle symbol stops (that is, the last symbol to stop is the middle symbol). On the other hand, in the chance mode, as will be described later, the symbol to be stopped last is not limited to the middle symbol, and may be a left symbol or a right symbol. In this case, reach is established even when the middle symbol and the right symbol become the same symbol, or when the left symbol and the middle symbol become the same symbol. Here, for example, in the middle symbol addition value determination table when the right symbol addition value is “1” shown in FIG. 44, when the left symbol is “1”, the right symbol addition value is “1”, the right symbol addition value is “1”. Becomes “two”, and if the middle symbol addition value is “0”, the middle symbol becomes “two”. In this case, the left, middle, and right off-symbols are “one and two”. This symbol is a “missing symbol” in which the reach is not established in the normal production mode, but the reach is established in the chance mode. If established, the player may be misunderstood. Similarly, for example, in the middle symbol addition value determination table when the right symbol addition value is “1” shown in FIG. 44, for example, when the left symbol is “1”, the right symbol addition value is “1”, the right symbol addition value is “1”. If the symbol is “2” and the middle symbol addition value is “11”, the middle symbol is “1”. In this case, the left middle right off-set symbol is “11 and 12”. This symbol is a “missing symbol” in which the reach is not established in the normal performance mode, but the reach is established in the chance mode. If established, the player may be misunderstood. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the middle symbol addition value determination table according to the right symbol addition value, the determination is made with respect to the middle symbol addition value for the right symbol such that the middle symbol is the same as the right symbol or the left symbol. A value is not allocated. When the left and right symbols are always reached, determination values may be assigned to all of the right symbol addition values 0 to 11.

  In step S1011, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a medium symbol addition value determination table for the chance-forbidden pattern according to the left and right symbols determined in steps S1003 and S1006 (step S1011). 47 and 48, tables for each chance eye prohibition pattern are prepared as medium symbol addition value determination tables for chance eye prohibition patterns corresponding to the left and right symbols, respectively. Then, in accordance with the random number value extracted in step S1007, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol of the off symbol using the middle symbol addition value determination table for the chance prohibition pattern selected in step S1011. (Step S1012).

  In the medium symbol addition value determination table for the chance eye prohibition pattern shown in FIG. 47 and FIG. 48, the chance eye (chance eye A (1C to 12C), chance eye B (13C to 15C), and random use shown in FIGS. A determination value is not allocated to the addition value of the middle symbol for the right symbol that is a common chance for small hits (16C) (that is, the number of determination values to be allocated is 0). For example, if the left symbol is “seven” and the right symbol is “spring” as shown in FIG. 47, the left symbol is “winter” and the right symbol is “spring”. • The left symbol is “summer” and the right symbol is “spring”. In the table in the case of “”, determination values are not assigned to the addition values “1”, “3”, and “10” for the right symbol. If the added value for the right design is “1”, there is a possibility that it corresponds to the chance item (5C or 12C) of “Natsunatsu Spring” or “Winter Summer Spring”, and if the added value for the right design is “3”, There is a possibility that it corresponds to chance chance (9C or 16C) of “Seven winter spring” or “summer winter spring”, and if the added value for the right pattern is “10”, it corresponds to chance chance of “summer seven spring” (3C) Because there is a possibility of doing. Thus, by determining the middle symbol using the middle symbol addition value determination table for the chance eye prohibition rule, it is possible to reliably prevent the chance eye from being established.

  47 and 48, the medium symbol addition value determination table for the chance eye prohibition pattern is not the chance eye shown in FIGS. Judgment is also made for the added value of the middle symbol for the right symbol that is similar to the chance-like appearance, so that “seven spring / winter”, “sixty-eight autumn”, etc .: A value has not been allocated. If the chance-like similar appearance is displayed, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that the chance-like appearance is displayed. However, by prohibiting the chance-like similarity appearance in the tables of FIGS. 47 and 48, It is also possible not to display the chance-like similar appearance, and it is possible to reliably prevent misunderstanding of the player.

  In this embodiment, the random number (medium symbol determining random number) for determining the added value for the right symbol extracted in step S1007 of the reach-less losing determination process is referred to as a third symbol random number (third identification information random number). As shown in FIGS. 44 to 48, the third design random number is “/ 163”, that is, the number of random numbers is 0 to 162, and the first design random number of “/ 107” and the first design random number of “/ 73”. This is a random number different from the two-design random number (second identification information random number).

  In this way, the left symbol, the right symbol (added value for the left symbol), and the middle symbol (added value for the right symbol) are used by using different random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number and third symbol random number), respectively. Since it is configured to determine, there are a variety of combinations of left, middle, and right off-symbols that are not reachable. That is, when the 1st design random number, the 2nd design random number, and the 3rd design random number are updated in the same range, if the update timing and the extraction timing of these random numbers are synchronized, Although there is a risk of being biased, as described above, the first symbol random number, the second symbol random number, and the third symbol random number are configured to be updated in different ranges. Will not be biased.

  If the effect mode is the chance mode in step S1001 (Y in step S1001), the effect control microcomputer 100 refers to the symbol before the change start (the symbol that is displayed for a moment before the change starts. The symbol determination process before the start of change for determining the outcome is also executed (step S1013). The symbol determination process before the change start will be described with reference to FIG. After that, the production control microcomputer 100 executes a reach-less-change-variable stop symbol determination process for determining a stop-change symbol when there is no reach (stop symbol when stop-change) (step S1014). The detailed contents of the variable stop symbol determination process when no reach is lost will be described later (see FIG. 55).

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the pre-variation symbol determination process. In the symbol determination process before the change start, the effect control microcomputer 100 first extracts a random number for selecting the appearance type (step S1021). Then, according to the extracted random number value, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the pattern type (start type) before the start of variation using the output type selection table shown in FIG. 53 when there is no reach. S1022).

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the outcome type selection table when there is no reach, a plurality of determination values are assigned to each of the types of symbols before the start of change. There are five types of symbols, “Normal”, “Sanko Fuda”, “Saga / Deer / Butterfly”, “4/4/4”, and “5/5/5”. As described above, in this embodiment, the decorative symbol is “Hanafuda”, but “normal” is a decorative symbol that does not serve as a floral symbol and is not a big hit symbol (sloofer). It is a combination. “Sanko Fuda” is a combination of decorative symbols in which the role of Sanko on the Hanafuda has been established (a combination of three out of four 20-point cards excluding “Frog Ono-do”). “Tsubaki / Deer / Butterfly” is a combination of decorative patterns (a combination of “Tsubaki ni Rin”, “Autumn Leaves Deer”, and “Peoni Butterflies”) that has the role of the Hanafuda Stag butterfly. “Four, Four, Four” is a state where the symbols of “Four” are aligned. “5 ・ 5 ・ 5” is a state in which the symbols of “5” are available.

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the outcome type selection table when there is no reach, a large number of judgment values are assigned to “normal”, and a few judgment values are assigned to “Sanko-fuda”, “Kami / Deer / Butterfly”. Only allocated. Also, “4, 4, 4” and “5, 5, 5” are not assigned judgment values. Therefore, when there is no reach, “4 ・ 4 ・ 4” or “5 ・ 5 ・ 5” is not selected as the pre-change start symbol.

  The production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the type (outgoing type) of the pre-variation symbol selected in step S1022 is “normal” (step S1023). If it is “normal” (Y in step S1023), the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a random number for determining a loss eye (step S1024). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores a loss eye using the loss eye determination table shown in FIG. 54 in accordance with the extracted random number value (step S1025). Here, “losing eyes” refers to a combination of decorative symbols that do not fulfill the role of the Hanafuda selected in the “normal” state and that are not jackpot symbols. In the losing eye determination table shown in FIG. 54, a plurality of determination values are assigned substantially evenly to each losing eye.

  If it is not “normal” in step S1023 (N in step S1023), it is determined whether or not the type (distance type) of the pre-change start symbol selected in step S1022 is “Sanko-fuda” or “Tanka butterfly”. Determination is made (step S1026). If it is “Sanko-fuda” or “Toshiba butterfly” (Y in step S1026), “chance eye A” or “chance eye B” predetermined as the outcome of “Sanko-fuda” or “Toshika butterfly” is used. Determine and store (step S1027). Here, the chance item A predetermined as the outcome of the “Sanko bill” is one type of “winter summer spring”, and the chance item B predetermined as the outcome of the “sword deer” is one type of “ Rokukihachi ”.

  Next, if it is not “Sanko-fuda” or “Tatsumi butterfly” in Step S1026 (N in Step S1026), the type (distance type) of the pre-change start symbol selected in Step S1022 is “four, four, four”. It determines with it being "5 * 5 * 5", and determines and stores "4 * 4 * 4" "5 * 5 * 5" as a symbol before a change start (step S1028). In addition, when there is no reach, judgment values are not assigned to “4, 4, 4”, “5, 5, 5”, so “4, 4, 4”, “5, 5, "5" will not be decided.

  FIG. 55 and FIG. 56 are flowcharts showing the fluctuation stop symbol determination process when no reach is lost. Here, the fluctuation stop symbol refers to a decorative symbol stop symbol that is derived and displayed when the symbol fluctuation is stopped when the reach is not reached. In addition, the fluctuation stop symbol when there is no reach is also referred to as a losing eye. In the variation stop symbol determination process when no reach is lost, the production control microcomputer 100 first extracts a random number for selecting the type of the loss eye (step S1031). Then, in accordance with the extracted random number value, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the type of losing eye (variation stop pattern type) using the losing eye type selection table shown in FIG. 57 (step S1032).

  In the losing eye type selection table when the reach is out of reach, as shown in FIG. 57, a plurality of determination values are assigned to each type of losing eye (fluctuation stop symbol). There are three types of losing eyes: “Normal Fluctuating System”, “Gase Sanko Fuda”, and “Gase Samurai / Deer / Butterfly”. As described above, in this embodiment, the decorative symbol is “flower card”, but the “normal variation system” is a combination of decorative symbols in which no role of the floral symbol is established. “Gase Sanko-fuda” is a combination of decorative symbols that two of the three decorative symbols are the symbols of the Sanko role of Hanafuda, but only one symbol (right symbol) is not the symbol of the role of Sanko. . “Gase 猪 / Deer / Butterfly” is a symbol of the role of a stag butterfly on two of the three decorative symbols, but only one symbol (the symbol on the right) is a symbol of the role of a stag butterfly. It is not a decorative pattern combination. In principle, during the chance mode, symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol.

  The production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the variation stop symbol type (losing eye type) selected in step S1032 is the “normal variation system” (step S1033). If it is the “normal variation system” (Y in step S1033), the production control microcomputer 100 determines the left middle right off-set symbols by the same processing as the processing in steps S1002 to S1012 of FIG. 42 (step S1034). S1044).

  That is, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a left symbol determining random number (step S1034). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the left symbol of the off symbol using the left symbol selection table (FIG. 43, FIG. 49, FIG. 50, FIG. 51) according to the extracted random number value (step S1035). ).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts the right symbol determining random number (step S1036). Then, the right symbol addition value determination table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected (step S1037).

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the right symbol of the off symbol using the right symbol addition value determination table selected in step S1037 according to the extracted random number value (step S1038).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1039). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the determined left and right symbols are a chance-forbidden pattern (an arrangement pattern of a left symbol and a right symbol that can cause a chance eye) (step S1040). When it is determined in step S1040 that it corresponds to the chance eye prohibition pattern (Y in step S1040), the medium symbol addition value determination table for chance eye prohibition is used (step S1043). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1040 that the pattern does not correspond to the chance eye prohibition pattern (N in step S1040), a normal medium symbol addition value determination table that is not for chance eye prohibition is used (step S1041).

  In step S1041, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a middle symbol addition value determination table corresponding to the right symbol addition value determined in step S1038 (step S1041). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol of the off symbol using the middle symbol addition value determination table selected in step S1041 according to the random value extracted in step S1039 (step S1042).

  In step S1043, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a medium symbol addition value determination table for the chance-forbidden pattern according to the left and right symbols determined in steps S1035 and S1038 (step S1043). Then, in accordance with the random number value extracted in step S1039, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol of the off symbol using the middle symbol addition value determination table for the chance prohibition pattern selected in step S1043. (Step S1044).

  In step S1033, if the variation stop symbol type (losing eye type) selected in step S1032 is not “normal variation system” (N in step S1033), the production control microcomputer 100 determines the random chance-determining eyes. Is extracted (step S1046). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the variation stop symbol type (losing eye type) selected in step S1032 is “Gase Sanko” (step S1047). If it is “Gase Sanko Fuda” (Y in step S1047), the production control microcomputer 100 uses the gasse chance eye A selection table shown in FIG. 58 according to the random number value extracted in step S1046 to display the left middle symbol ( The left symbol and the middle symbol are determined and stored (step S1048). As shown in FIG. 58, a combination of three light symbols is set as a combination of the left symbol and the middle symbol, and a plurality of determination values are substantially equal to the combination of symbols. Allocated. In the left diagram of FIG. 58, the leftmost number (15 or 16) indicates the number of determination values, and the two symbols on the right side of the number are the left symbol and the middle symbol (for example, “Nanaharu” The right symbol of the gasses chance determined in step S1050 using the right diagram of FIG. 58 is entered at the rightmost circled number (1).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a right symbol determining random number (this random number is the same as the random number extracted in steps S1004 and S1036) (step S1049). Then, according to the extracted random number value, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the right symbol of the off symbol (gasse chance) using the right symbol addition value determination table for the gasse chance A shown in FIG. S1050). As shown in FIG. 58, the right symbol addition value determination table for gasses chance A is assigned a plurality of judgment values substantially equally to symbols other than “seven”, “spring”, “summer”, and “winter” symbols. It is. The reason why the judgment value is not assigned to the symbols “seven”, “spring”, “summer”, and “winter” is that the chance eye A is not established.

  In step S1047, if the variation stop symbol type selected in step S1032 (losing eye type) is not “Gase Sanko Fuda” (N in step S1047), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the variation stop symbol type (N It is determined that the “Lossing Eye Type” is “Gasse Moe / Deer / Butterfly”. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the left middle symbol (the left symbol and the middle symbol) using the gashesis chance B selection table shown in FIG. 59 according to the random value extracted in step S1046 (step S1046). S1051). As shown in FIG. 59, the combination of the left symbol and the middle symbol is set as the combination of the symbol of the moth, deer, and butterfly, and the determination table B selection table has a plurality of determinations for the combination of symbols. Values are allocated almost evenly.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a right symbol determining random number (this random number is also the same as the random number extracted in steps S1004 and S1036) (step S1052). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the right symbol of the off symbol (gasse chance) using the right symbol addition value determination table for the gash chance eye B shown in FIG. 59 in accordance with the extracted random number value (step). S1053). As shown in FIG. 59, in the right symbol addition value determination table for the gasse chance eye B, a plurality of determination values are allocated substantially equally to symbols other than the symbols “6”, “8”, and “autumn”. . The reason why the determination value is not assigned to the symbols “6”, “8”, and “autumn” is that the chance eye B is not established. During the chance mode, the chance tempe appears at a certain rate, so that it is possible to have interest in the chance eye (whether or not it becomes a chance eye).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing reach determination loss determination processing (step S655). In the reach determination loss determination process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the current production mode is the chance mode (step S1061). Whether or not the current production mode is the chance mode is determined by checking whether or not a chance mode flag indicating that the production mode is in the chance mode is set.

  When the effect mode is not the chance mode but the normal effect mode (N in step S1061), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a reach design determining random number (step S1062). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores reach symbols (left and right symbols) using the reach symbol selection table shown in FIG. 61 according to the extracted random number values (step S1063). In the reach symbol selection table, as shown in FIG. 61, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the left and right symbols substantially equally. The production control microcomputer 100 determines the design of the determination value that matches the random number value as the reach design.

  In this embodiment, the random numbers (reach symbol determination random numbers) for determining the reach symbols (left and right symbols) extracted in step S1062 of the reach-with-losing determination process are referred to as reach symbol random numbers (reach identification information random numbers). As shown in FIG. 61, the reach design random number is “/ 119”, that is, a random number having a number of 0 to 118. As described above, the first symbol random number, the second symbol random number, the third symbol random number, and the reach symbol random number are different random numbers that are updated in different ranges.

  As described above, the reach control microcomputer 100 determines the reach symbol using the reach symbol determination random number, and the game control microcomputer 560 determines the symbol difference of the middle symbol relative to the reach symbol. Therefore, there are a variety of combinations of left, right, and right off-point symbols when reaching reach.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol based on the variation pattern command (step S1064). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern commands 8006 (H) to 8029 (H) as the variation pattern commands at the time of the loss of reach. These variation pattern commands specify the reach mode and the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 14, (-3) indicates that the symbol difference is −3 frames, (−2) indicates that the symbol difference is −2 frames, and (−1) indicates that the symbol difference is −1 frame. This indicates that there is a symbol difference, (+1) indicates that the symbol difference is +1 frame, and (+2) indicates that the symbol difference is +2 frames. For example, if the reach symbol is determined to be “7” and the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol specified by the variation pattern command is (−2), the middle symbol is “5” and the variation stop symbol is “755”. It becomes.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later (as will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126), when normal reach is designated by the fluctuation pattern command, the first stop symbol (left Symbol) and the second stop symbol (right symbol) stop at the same symbol and develop into normal reach. After the normal reach changes for a predetermined period, the final stop symbol (medium symbol) stops and the reach is lost. In this case, the reach symbol determined in step S1063 is the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol that are stopped at the time of development to normal reach, and the middle symbol determined in step S1064 is stopped at the end of the variation. It is a design. Also, when super reach is specified by the fluctuation pattern command, after the normal fluctuation is performed for a predetermined period, the first stop symbol (left symbol) and the second stop symbol (right symbol) stop at the same symbol and become normal reach The temporary stop symbol (medium symbol) temporarily stops after a normal reach change for a predetermined period, and then the temporary stop symbol is changed again to develop a super reach, and the super reach change is performed for a predetermined period. After that, the final stop symbol (medium symbol) stops and the reach is lost. In this case, the reach symbol determined in step S1063 is the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol that are stopped at the time of development to normal reach, and the intermediate symbol determined in step S1064 is stopped at the end of the variation. It is a design. Although not shown in FIG. 60, the temporary stop symbol of the middle symbol displayed temporarily before the development of super reach (after the end of the normal reach) is a symbol of the symbol difference +1 with respect to the reach symbol (one frame of the reach symbol). The following design).

  In step S1061, when the effect mode is the chance mode (Y in step S1061), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the pre-change start symbol (also referred to as the pre-change appearance). A determination process is executed (step S1065).

  In this embodiment, the pre-variation symbol determination process in step S1065 is a process having the same content as that in step S1013 in FIG. 42 (that is, the same subroutine process). However, as an output type selection table used when selecting the type of pattern before start of change (output type), instead of using the output type selection table shown in FIG. The type of the pattern before the start of change (outline type) is selected using the above-explained type selection table when there is a loss of reach. As shown in FIG. 62, in the outcome type selection table when the reach is out, determination values are not assigned to “4, 4, 4” and “5, 5, 5”. Therefore, when the reach is off, “4 ・ 4 ・ 4” or “5 ・ 5 ・ 5” is not selected as the symbol before the start of change.

  In this embodiment, in the table shown in FIG. 53 and the table shown in FIG. 62, the determination values are assigned to the same type, but, for example, in the type selection table when there is a reach failure. However, the distribution ratios may be made different by, for example, increasing the distribution of the judgment values for “Sanko-fuda” and “Toshikacho”. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make a reach notice according to the type of the pattern before the start of change (the appearance before turning down).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 executes a reach-with-losing-variation-variable stop symbol determination process for determining a variable-stop symbol when the reach is lost (stop symbol when the variable is stopped) (step S1066).

  FIG. 63 and FIG. 64 are flowcharts showing the change stop symbol determination process when the reach is lost. In the reach stop variability stop symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a reach symbol determination random number (this random number is also a reach symbol random number) (step S1071). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the reach symbol using the reach symbol selection table shown in FIG. 61 according to the extracted random number value (step S1072). In the chance mode, the reach symbols are not limited to left and right symbols, but may be left symbols and middle symbols, and middle symbols and right symbols.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the final stop symbol based on the variation pattern command (step S1073). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, the production control microcomputer 100 specifies the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol by using 8006 (H) to 8029 (H) as the variation pattern command at the time of the loss of reach. The final stop symbol (the symbol that stops last) is determined from the symbol difference. Note that the final stop symbol is not limited to the middle symbol in the chance mode, but may be the left symbol or the right symbol.

  Here, when the normal reach is designated by the variation pattern command, the reach symbols determined in step S1072 are the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol that are stopped during the development to the normal reach, and are determined in step S1073. The final stop symbol is a final stop symbol that is stopped at the end of variation. When super reach is specified by the variation pattern command, the reach symbols determined in step S1072 are the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol that are stopped when developing to normal reach, and are determined in step S1073. The final stop symbol is a final stop symbol that is stopped at the end of variation. Although not shown in FIG. 63, the temporary stop symbol of the third stop symbol displayed temporarily before the development of super reach (after the fluctuation of normal reach) is a symbol of the symbol difference +1 with respect to the reach symbol (the reach symbol) It is said that the frame is one frame next).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a random number for selecting the type of change in the middle of a change (step S1074). Here, the change halfway out means a turn that is temporarily stopped in the middle of the change of the decorative design (combination of the temporary stop design of the decorative design). A change in the middle of a change is also referred to as a change in progress symbol.

  In this embodiment, after the normal fluctuation is performed for a predetermined period, the midpoint of the fluctuation is temporarily stopped and then developed into super reach (any of super reach A to C). In this case, the normal reach is not changed. Alternatively, after the normal variation is performed for a predetermined period, the midpoint of the variation is temporarily stopped, and then the normal variation is performed, and the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped in order and developed into super reach. In this case, the normal reach is not changed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a variation mid-item type selection table corresponding to the variation pattern and reach design from FIGS. 65 to 72 (step S1075).

  FIG. 65 is a variation mid-course type selection table when the variation pattern is out of normal (8006 (H) to 800E (H)) and the reach symbol is an uncertain variation symbol. FIG. 66 is a variation mid-course type selection table when the variation pattern is out of normal (8006 (H) to 800E (H)) and the reach symbol is a probability variation symbol. FIG. 67 is a change-over-progress type selection table when the variation pattern is out of super A (800F (H) to 801A (H)) and the reach symbol is an uncertain variation symbol. FIG. 68 is a variation type selection table during variation when the variation pattern is out of super A (800F (H) to 801A (H)) and the reach symbol is a probability variation symbol. FIG. 69 is a change-over-attack type selection table when the variation pattern is out of super B (801B (H) to 801E (H)) and the reach symbol is an uncertain variation symbol. FIG. 70 is a changeable item type selection table when the variation pattern is out of super B (801B (H) to 801E (H)) and the reach symbol is a probability variation symbol. FIG. 71 is a change-over-attack type selection table when the change pattern is out of super C (801F (H) to 8029 (H)) and the reach design is an uncertain change design. FIG. 72 is a variation mid-item type selection table when the variation pattern is out of super C (801F (H) to 8029 (H)) and the reach symbol is a probability variation symbol.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 72, in the variation mid-item type selection table when the reach is lost, a plurality of determination values are assigned to each of the variation middle symbol types (patterns that develop into reach). Yes. There are four types of symbols in the middle of a change: “normal”, “three-light bills”, “deer head”, and “other than deer head”. “Normal” is a pattern in which a symbol in the middle of a change from a normal change is developed to a normal reach without being temporarily stopped. “Sanko Fuda” is a pattern that develops into a super-reach after a symbol on the way of change is temporarily stopped and displayed by a combination of decorative symbols of three light roles from normal change. "Deer head" is a pattern that develops into a super reach after a temporary stop display of a symbol in the middle of a change by a combination of decorative symbols of the role of a deer butterfly whose leading symbol is "deer (autumn)" from the normal variation . “Other than deer head” is a super-reach after the symbol is temporarily stopped by the combination of the decorative symbol of the role of the deer butterfly that is the symbol other than “deer (autumn)” from the normal variation. Pattern.

  In the variation mid-item type selection table (FIGS. 65 and 66) when the variation pattern is normal reach, “normal” is always selected as the variation symbol type. In other words, the chance eye is not temporarily stopped as an outcome during the change. In addition, in the variation midway item type selection table when the variation pattern is Super Reach, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 72, depending on whether the reach symbol is a probability variation symbol or a non-probability variation symbol, a certain type of variation middle symbol is selected. Judgment value is not assigned. For example, when the reach symbol is a non-probable variable symbol, as shown in FIG. 65, FIG. 67, FIG. 69 and FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 66, FIG. 68, FIG. 70, and FIG. 72, the determination value is not assigned to the “deer head”.

  The production control microcomputer 100 selects the changing middle type according to the random number extracted in step S1074, using the changing middle type selection table selected in step S1075 (step S1076). For example, the variation pattern is “Super A out of place (0 or 1 frame slip)” (800F (H), 8012 (H), 8015 (H), or 8018 (H)), and the reach symbol determined in step S1072 is the probability variation symbol. In this case, the table of “0 or 1 frame slip” at the time of the super A deviation probability change reach shown in FIG. 68 is selected. Then, “any one” of “normal”, “three-story bill”, and “other than deer head” is selected as the type of the changing symbol corresponding to the random value (pattern that develops to reach).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the type of the midway change selected in step S1076 is “normal” (step S1077). If it is “normal”, the symbol in the middle of the change from the normal change is not temporarily displayed, and the normal reach is developed. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a tempering motion selection random number (step S1078). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a template operation selection table corresponding to the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 73 to 76 (step S1079). Here, the “tempered operation” refers to an operation until the reach is developed. Depending on the mode of the tempering operation, it is also determined whether one of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is the final stop symbol.

  FIG. 73 is a template operation selection table when the fluctuation pattern is 0 or 1 frame slide. FIG. 74 is a template operation selection table when the variation pattern is a 2 or 3 frame slide. FIG. 75 is a template operation selection table when the variation pattern is a four-frame slide or a five-frame slide. FIG. 76 is a template operation selection table when the variation pattern is a six-frame slide.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a tempered motion using the tempered motion selection table selected in step S1079 according to the random value extracted in step S1078 (step S1080).

  73 to 76, “right side” means that the final stop symbol is the right symbol, and “middle side” means that the final stop symbol is the middle symbol. This means “left tilt” means that the final stop symbol is the left symbol. “Middle 1 burning” means that the middle symbol slips by one frame, and “Middle 2 burning” means that the middle symbol slips by two frames, and reach occurs. “Medium 3 burning” means that the middle symbol slips by 3 frames, and “medium 0 burning” means that the reach occurs without slipping. Further, “one burn left and right after stopping” means that a reach occurs when the left and right symbols slip by one frame after the decorative symbol stops. Also, “right and left one burn after stopping one middle burn” means that the decorative symbol stops after the middle symbol slips one frame, and then the left and right symbols slip one frame and reach occurs. As a burning effect, an effect is produced in which a bill (symbol) burns and a different bill (symbol) appears. In addition, the number of frames that the symbol slides in the burning effect during the chance mode does not necessarily match the “◯ top” of “○ top slip” specified by the variation pattern.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a pattern selection random number (step S1081), and according to the extracted random number value, the pattern selection table shown in FIG. Pattern 2 (P2) is selected (step S1082). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a symbol transition pattern determination table for determining the symbol transition pattern based on the template operation selected in step S1080 (step S1083). The symbol transition pattern is a pattern in which symbols shift during the tempering operation. The symbol transition pattern determination table is shown in FIGS.

  The symbol transition pattern determination table is divided for each type of template operation selected in step S1080. The symbol transition pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78 is used in the middle burning right tilt system. The symbol transition pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79 is used in the middle burning middle tilt system operation. The symbol transition pattern determination table shown in FIG. 80 is used in the middle burn left tilt system. The symbol transition pattern determination table shown in FIG. 81 is used during a tempering operation of the left and right one burning after stopping. The symbol transition pattern determination table shown in FIG. 82 is used in the tempering operation for the left and right one burning tilt after the middle one burning stop.

  Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a symbol transition pattern using the symbol transition pattern determination table selected in step S1083 (step S1084). In the symbol transition pattern determination table, as shown in FIGS. 78 to 82, symbol transition patterns are divided by reach symbols, and symbol patterns of the same reach symbol are further divided by the pattern (P1 or P2) selected in step S1082. It has been. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 first confirms the reach symbol determined in step S1072, and confirms the pattern selected in step S1082. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the symbol transition pattern determination table to select and determine the reach symbol and the symbol transition pattern corresponding to the pattern.

  For example, it is assumed that the symbol transition pattern determination table selected in step S1083 is the middle burned right tilt table shown in FIG. 78, the reach symbol is “5”, and the pattern is “P1”. In this case, the left symbol is temporarily stopped at “5”, the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at “spring”, and the middle symbol is “spring” from “seven”, “seven” from “autumn”, and “autumn”. Shift from "5" to reach. Thereafter, the reach operation (effect) specified by the variation pattern command is executed.

  Further, for example, it is assumed that the symbol transition pattern determination table selected in step S1083 is the middle-burning left tilt system table shown in FIG. 80, the reach symbol is “one”, and the pattern is “P1”. In this case, the left symbol is temporarily stopped at “four”, the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at “three”, the right symbol is temporarily stopped at “one”, and then the middle symbol is changed from “three” to “six”. Shifting from “6” to “1”, the middle symbol and the right symbol reach “one”. Thereafter, the reach operation (effect) specified by the variation pattern command is executed.

  In addition, for example, the symbol transition pattern determination table selected in step S1083 is the left and right one-burning and tilting table shown in FIG. 81, the reach symbol is “one”, and the pattern is “P1”. . In this case, the left symbol is temporarily stopped at “6”, the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at “summer”, the right symbol is temporarily stopped at “three”, and then the left symbol is burned and “6” to “1” In addition, the right symbol burns and shifts from “three” to “one”, and the left symbol and the right symbol reach “one”. Thereafter, the reach operation (effect) specified by the variation pattern command is executed.

  In addition, for example, the symbol transition pattern determination table selected in step S1083 is a table for the left and right one burning after stoppage of burning shown in FIG. 82, the reach symbol is “1”, and the pattern is “P1”. Suppose there is. In this case, the left symbol is temporarily stopped at “6”, the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at “summer”, the right symbol is temporarily stopped at “three”, and then the middle symbol is burned and “summer” to “four” And the left design burns from "6" to "1", the right design burns from "3" to "1", and the left and right designs reach "one". . Thereafter, the reach operation (effect) specified by the variation pattern command is executed.

  In step S1077, if the type of the result in the middle of the change is not “normal” (N in step S1077), the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a random number for selecting a tempering action (step S1085). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the type of the turn-out item is “three-way bill” (step S1086). If it is a “three-light bill” (Y in step S1086), the production control microcomputer 100 selects a tempered action selection table for the chance eye A according to the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 83 to 86 (step S1087A). . Here, the “tempered operation” refers to an operation until the chance eye A (three-light bill) is established.

  FIG. 83 is a template operation selection table when the fluctuation pattern is 0 or 1 frame slide. FIG. 84 is a template operation selection table when the variation pattern is a 2 or 3 frame slide. FIG. 85 is a template operation selection table when the variation pattern is a four-frame slide or a five-frame slide. FIG. 86 is a template operation selection table when the variation pattern is a six-frame slide.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a tempering action using the tempering action selection table for the chance eye A selected in step S1087A in accordance with the random value extracted in step S1085 (step S1088A).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye selection random number (step S1089A). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye A using the chance eye A selection table shown in FIG. 87 according to the extracted random number value (step S1090A). As shown in FIG. 87, in the chance eye A selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned substantially evenly to each chance eye A (three light bills). The effect control microcomputer 100 sets a chance eye A that coincides with the determination value extracted in step S1089A as a changeable output (temporary change symbol) that temporarily stops.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a pattern selection random number (step S1091A), and uses the pattern selection table shown in FIG. Pattern B (PB) is selected (step S1092A). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a symbol transition pattern determination table for determining the symbol transition pattern based on the template operation selected in step S1088A (step S1093A). The symbol transition pattern is a pattern in which symbols shift during the tempering operation. The symbol transition pattern determination table is shown in FIGS.

  The symbol transition pattern determination table is divided for each type of template operation selected in step S1088A. The symbol transition pattern determination table shown in FIG. 89 is used for a medium burn system tempering operation. The symbol transition pattern determination table shown in FIG. 90 is used for the left / right burning system tempering operation after stopping. The symbol transition pattern determination table shown in FIG. 91 is used during the left / right burning system tempering operation after the middle one burning stop.

  Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a symbol transition pattern using the symbol transition pattern determination table selected in step S1093A (step S1094A). In the symbol transfer pattern determination table, as shown in FIG. 89 to FIG. 91, it is divided according to the pattern (PA or PB) selected in step S1092A, and the symbol transfer pattern having the same pattern is determined in step S1090A. It is divided according to the contents of A. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 first confirms the contents of the chance eye A determined in step S1090A and confirms the pattern selected in step S1092A. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects and determines a symbol transition pattern corresponding to the pattern and the chance eye A using the symbol transition pattern determination table.

  For example, it is assumed that the symbol transition pattern determination table selected in step S1093A is the middle burn table shown in FIG. 89, the pattern is “PA”, and the chance eye A is “Seven spring summer”. In this case, after the temporary stop (left stop) at the left symbol is “7”, the middle symbol is shifted from “8” to “autumn”, from “autumn” to “three”, and from “three” to “spring”. When the right symbol is “Summer”, the temporary stop (right stop) is made, and the chance A is “Seven Spring Summer”. Thereafter, the super reach specified by the variation pattern command is developed, and the super reach operation (production) is executed.

  Also, for example, the symbol transition pattern determination table selected in step S1093A is the post-stop left / right burning system table shown in FIG. 90, the pattern is “PA”, and the chance eye A is “Seven spring summer”. . In this case, after the temporary stop (left stop) with the left symbol “5”, temporary stop (intermediate stop) with the middle symbol “spring”, and temporary stop (right stop) with the right symbol “6”, The left symbol burns to “7” from “5”, the right symbol burns to “summer” from “6”, and the chance eye A “Seven spring summer” is reached. Thereafter, the super reach specified by the variation pattern command is developed, and the super reach operation (production) is executed.

  In addition, for example, the symbol transition pattern determination table selected in step S1093A is the left / right burning system table after the middle burning stop shown in FIG. 91, the pattern is “PA”, and the chance eye A is “Seven spring summer”. Suppose there is. In this case, a temporary stop (left stop) occurs when the left symbol is “three”, a temporary stop (intermediate temporary stop) occurs when the middle symbol is “autumn”, and the middle symbol burns and shifts from “autumn” to “spring”. , Temporarily stop (right stop) with the right symbol “1”, then the left symbol burns from “three” to “seven”, the right symbol burns from “one” to “summer”, chances Eye A “Seven Spring Summer”. Thereafter, the super reach specified by the variation pattern command is developed, and the super reach operation (production) is executed.

  In step S1086, when the type of the change-over item is not “Sanko-fuda” (N in step S1086), the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the type of change-out item is “猪 / deer / butterfly (deer head or It is determined that it is “other than deer head”. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the tempered action selection table for chance eyes B according to the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 92 to 95 (step S1087B). Here, the “tempered operation” refers to an operation until the chance eye B (Butterfly Deer) is established.

  FIG. 92 is a template operation selection table when the fluctuation pattern is 0 or 1 frame slide. FIG. 93 is a template operation selection table when the variation pattern is a 2 or 3 frame slide. FIG. 94 is a template operation selection table when the variation pattern is a four-frame slide or a five-frame slide. FIG. 95 is a template operation selection table when the variation pattern is a six-frame slide.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a tempering action using the tempering action selection table for the chance eye B selected in step S1087B in accordance with the random value extracted in step S1085 (step S1088B).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye selection random number (step S1089B). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a chance eye B using the chance eye B selection table shown in FIG. 96 according to the extracted random number value (step S1090B). As shown in FIG. 96, the chance eye B selection table is divided into a table when “deer head” is selected and a table when “other than deer head” is selected. In the table when “Deer head” is selected, a combination of a combination of a frog, a deer, and a butterfly with a deer pattern (autumn) is set. In addition, the table when “other than deer head” is selected is a combination of a combination of the head of deer, deer and butterfly (one type of “deer butterfly”). ing. A plurality of determination values are assigned to each symbol. The production control microcomputer 100 determines whether “deer head” or “other than deer head” has been selected as a change-over item, selects a table, and matches the determination value extracted in step S1089B. It is assumed that the eye B is temporarily changed to be temporarily stopped (a symbol in the middle of change).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a pattern selection random number (step S1091B), and uses the pattern selection table shown in FIG. Pattern B (PB) is selected (step S1092B). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a symbol transition pattern determination table for determining the symbol transition pattern based on the template operation selected in step S1088B (step S1093B). The symbol transition pattern is a pattern in which symbols shift during the tempering operation. A symbol transition pattern determination table is shown in FIGS.

  The symbol transition pattern determination table is divided for each type of template operation selected in step S1088B. The symbol transition pattern determination table shown in FIG. 98 is used in the middle burn system tempering operation. The symbol transition pattern determination table shown in FIG. 99 is used for the left / right burning system tempering operation after stopping. The symbol transition pattern determination table shown in FIG. 100 is used for the left / right burning system tempering operation after the middle one burning stop.

  Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a symbol transition pattern using the symbol transition pattern determination table selected in step S1093B (step S1094B). In the symbol transfer pattern determination table, as shown in FIG. 98 to FIG. 100, the chances are divided by the pattern (PA or PB) selected in step S1092B, and the symbol transfer pattern of the same pattern is determined in step S1090B. It is divided by the contents of B. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 first confirms the contents of the chance eyes B determined in step S1090B and confirms the pattern selected in step S1092B. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects and determines the symbol transition pattern corresponding to the pattern and the chance eye B using the symbol transition pattern determination table.

  For example, it is assumed that the symbol transition pattern determination table selected in step S1093B is the medium burnt-type table shown in FIG. 98, the pattern is “PA”, and the chance eye B is “scorpion butterfly”. In this case, the left symbol is temporarily stopped (left stop) at “猪 (six)”, the middle symbol is “five” to “winter”, “winter” to “four”, “four” to “deer (autumn) ) ”, The right symbol is“ butterfly (eight) ”, temporarily stops (stops right), and becomes a chance eye B“ deer butterfly ”. Thereafter, the super reach specified by the variation pattern command is developed, and the super reach operation (production) is executed.

  FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the first probability variation design determination process (step S658). The first probability variation design determination process is a process executed when a variation pattern command indicating variation patterns 43 to 46, 71 to 76, and 100 to 103 shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 is received. . The first probability variation design determination processing (processing to determine the decorative symbol to be derived and displayed as any probability variation symbol) is a probability variation big hit (no re-drawing effect) in step S62, that is, “probability variation 1” shown in FIG. 19C. It is executed when is determined.

  In the first probability variation design determination process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the current production mode is the chance mode (step S1101). Whether or not the current production mode is the chance mode is determined by checking whether or not a chance mode flag indicating that the production mode is in the chance mode is set.

  When the effect mode is not the chance mode but the normal effect mode (N in Step S1101), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the execution of the re-drawing effect during the change is specified by the change pattern command. (Step S1102). When execution of the re-drawing effect during the change is not designated (N in Step S1102), the process proceeds to Step S1106. When execution of the re-drawing effect during the change is designated (Y in step S1102), the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a re-lottery selection random number (step S1103). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the re-lottery selection table at the time of the probability variation big hit according to the variation pattern (step S1104). 106, FIG. 108 and FIG. 110 show the re-lottery selection table at the time of the probable big hit.

  FIG. 106 is a re-lottery selection table of an eight-frame probability variation system (re-lottery effect in which the temporary winning symbol advances by eight frames and stops). FIG. 108 is a re-lottery selection table of a seven-frame probability variation system (re-lottery effect in which the temporary winning symbol advances by seven frames and stops). FIG. 110 is a re-lottery selection table of a five-frame probability variation system (re-lottery effect in which the temporary winning symbol advances by five frames and stops). As shown in FIG. 15, when “re-lottery 8 frames” is designated by the variation pattern command, the 8-frame probability variation system re-lottery selection table is selected. When “7 re-lottery 7 frames” is designated by the variation pattern command, a 7-frame probability variation re-lottery selection table is selected. When “5 re-lottery” is designated by the variation pattern command, a 5-frame reproducibility re-lot selection table is selected.

  In the re-lottery selection table shown in FIGS. 106, 108, and 110, a plurality of determination values are assigned for each re-lottery pattern. The re-drawing pattern defines a symbol transition pattern from a predetermined temporary winning symbol to a probable variation symbol. For example, in the 8-frame probability variation re-lottery selection table shown in FIG. 106, a re-lottery pattern in which the symbol fluctuates (progresses) from the temporary winning symbol “one” to the probable variation symbol “spring” or the temporary winning symbol “six”. A re-lottery pattern that fluctuates from the probability variation pattern “winter” (goes back to “winter” to advance to “one”) is defined. In the re-lottery selection table shown in FIG. 106, in principle, a re-lottery effect is set in which the temporary winning symbol advances by 8 frames and stops. However, a re-lottery effect that stops without advancing by 8 frames (only 7 frames advance). There is no redrawing effect). Similarly, in the re-lottery selection table shown in FIG. 108, in principle, a re-lottery effect is set in which the temporary winning symbol advances by 7 frames and stops. However, a re-lottery effect that stops without advancing by 7 frames (only 6 frames) 110 is also set, and in the re-lottery selection table shown in FIG. 110, as a rule, a re-lottery effect is set in which the temporary winning symbol advances by 5 frames, but stops without advancing by 5 frames. A re-lottery effect (re-lottery effect that advances only 4 frames) is also set. As shown in FIGS. 106, 108, and 110, in the re-lottery selection table, the number of determination values assigned to each re-lottery pattern is not uniform. Therefore, the rate at which a specific re-lottery pattern is determined is higher than other re-lottery patterns. In addition, regarding the final stop symbol that is stopped and displayed after the re-lottery effect is performed, the ratio that the specific probability variable symbol is determined is higher than other probability variable symbols.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 uses the re-lottery selection table corresponding to the variation pattern shown in FIG. 106, FIG. 108 or FIG. 110 according to the random number value extracted in step S1103, and the probable change symbol. Is determined and stored (step S1105). For example, in the case where the re-lottery selection table (five-frame probability variation system) shown in FIG. 110 is selected, the re-lottery pattern that matches the random number is the temporary winning symbol “one” and tries to advance to the non-probable variable symbol “six”. Suppose that it is a return pattern. In this case, the “provisional winning symbol” is determined to be the uncertain variable symbol “1”, and the probability variable symbol after the re-lottery execution is determined to be “5”.

  If it is determined in step S1102 that execution of the re-drawing effect that is changing is not specified (N in step S1102), the process of step S1106 is executed. In step S1106, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determining random number (step S1106). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the probability variation symbol at the time of the suspension of the variation using the probability variation symbol selection table shown in FIG. 103 according to the extracted random value (step S1107). As shown in FIG. 103, in the probability variation symbol selection table, the number of determination values distributed to each probability variation symbol is not uniform. Therefore, the rate at which a specific probability variation symbol is determined is higher than other probability variation symbols.

  In step S1101, if the effect mode is the chance mode (Y in step S1101), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the pre-change start symbol (also referred to as the pre-change appearance). A determination process is executed (step S1108).

  In this embodiment, the pre-variation symbol determination processing in step S1108 is processing having the same contents as in step S1013 in FIG. 42 and step S1065 in FIG. 60 (that is, processing in the same subroutine). However, as the appearance type selection table used when selecting the type of pattern before starting the change (output type), the output type selection table shown in FIG. 53 when there is no reach and the reach type shown in FIG. Instead of using the output type selection table at the time of loss, the type of output pre-change start (output type) is selected using the output type selection table at the probability variation big hit shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 112, in the outcome type selection table at the probability variation big hit, determination values are also assigned to “4, 4, 4” and “5, 5, 5”. Therefore, “4, 4, 4” or “5, 5, 5” can be selected as the symbol before starting the change. When “4, 4, 4” or “5, 5, 5” is selected, 100% jackpot is confirmed. “4, 4, 4” and “5, 5, 5” are sometimes called big hits.

  In addition, since “5 ・ 5 ・ 5” is selected only at the probability variation big hit (as shown in FIG. 111, the judgment value is not assigned to “5 ・ 5 ・ 5” at the time of non-probable variation big hit. ) When “5 ・ 5 ・ 5” is selected, it means that 100% probability big hit is fixed.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a big hit time variable stop symbol determination process for determining a variable stop symbol at the time of big hit (stop symbol at the time of variable stop) (step S1109). The detailed contents of the big hit change stop symbol determination process will be described later (see FIGS. 117 to 119).

  FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the uncertain variable symbol determination process (step S661). The uncertain variable symbol determination process is a process executed when a variation pattern command indicating variation patterns 47 to 50 and 77 to 78 shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 is received. The non-probable change symbol determination process (a process for determining the decorative symbol to be derived and displayed as one of the non-probability variable symbols) is a normal big hit or a probable big hit (with re-drawing effect) in step S62, that is, “normal” shown in FIG. "" Probability change 2 "" Probability change 3 "is executed when determined.

  In the non-probable variable symbol determination process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the current production mode is the chance mode (step S1111). Whether or not the current production mode is the chance mode is determined by checking whether or not a chance mode flag indicating that the production mode is in the chance mode is set.

  When the effect mode is not the chance mode but the normal effect mode (N in Step S1111), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the execution of the re-drawing effect during the change is specified by the change pattern command. (Step S1112). When execution of the re-drawing effect during the change is not designated (N in Step S1112), the process proceeds to Step S1116. When execution of the re-lottery effect during the change is designated (Y in step S1112), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a re-lottery selection random number (step S1113). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the re-lottery selection table for the non-probable big hit (normal big hit) according to the variation pattern (step S1114). 105, 107 and 109 show the re-lottery selection tables at the time of non-probable big hit.

  FIG. 105 is a re-lottery selection table of the eight-frame cascading system (re-lottery effect in which the temporary winning symbol advances by eight frames). FIG. 107 is a re-lottery selection table of a seven-frame cascading system (a re-lottery effect in which the temporary winning symbol advances by seven frames and stops). FIG. 109 is a re-lottery selection table of a five-frame probability variation system (re-lottery effect in which the temporary winning symbol advances by five frames and stops). As shown in FIG. 15, when “re-lottery 8 frames” is designated by the variation pattern command, the 8-frame re-lottery selection table is selected. When “7 re-lottery 7 frames” is designated by the variation pattern command, the 7-frame re-lottery selection table is selected. When “5 re-lottery 5 frames” is designated by the variation pattern command, a 5-frame re-lottery selection table is selected.

  In the re-lottery selection tables shown in FIGS. 105, 107, and 109, a plurality of determination values are assigned for each re-lottery pattern. In the re-lottery pattern, a pattern transition pattern from a predetermined temporary winning symbol to a non-probable variation symbol (also referred to as a dregs symbol) is defined. For example, in the re-lottery selection table of 8-comacus system shown in FIG. 105, the re-lottery pattern in which the symbol fluctuates (progresses) from the temporary winning symbol “one” to the non-probable variable symbol “eight”, or the temporary winning symbol “six” A re-lottery pattern that varies from 1 to a non-probable symbol “1” is defined. In addition, in the re-lottery selection table shown in FIG. 105, in principle, a re-lottery effect is set in which the temporary winning symbol advances by 8 frames and stops, but the re-lottery effect that stops without advancing by 8 frames (only 7 frames advance). No redrawing effect or redrawing effect that only advances 6 frames). Similarly, in the re-lottery selection table shown in FIG. 107, in principle, a re-lottery effect is set in which the temporary winning symbol advances by 7 frames and stops, but the re-lottery effect that stops without advancing by 7 frames (only 6 frames) 109 is also set, and in the re-lottery selection table shown in FIG. 109, in principle, a re-lottery effect is set in which the temporary winning symbol is advanced by 5 frames, but stops without advancing by 5 frames. A re-lottery effect (re-lottery effect that advances only 4 frames) is also set. As shown in FIGS. 105, 107, and 109, in the re-lottery selection table, the number of determination values distributed to each re-lottery pattern is not uniform. Therefore, the rate at which a specific re-lottery pattern is determined is higher than other re-lottery patterns. In addition, regarding the final stop symbol that is stopped and displayed after the re-lottery effect is performed, the ratio at which a specific non-probable variable symbol is determined is higher than other non-probable variable symbols.

  The production control microcomputer 100 uses the re-lottery selection table corresponding to the variation pattern shown in FIG. 105, FIG. 107, or FIG. A symbol is determined and stored (step S1115). For example, in the case where the re-lottery selection table (five coma) is selected as shown in FIG. 109, the re-lottery pattern that matches the random number is the temporary winning symbol “one” and the pattern that advances to the uncertain variable symbol “six”. Suppose. In this case, the “provisional winning symbol” is determined to be the uncertain variable symbol “one” and the non-probable variable symbol after execution of the re-lottery effect is “six”.

  In step S1112, when execution of the re-drawing effect in change is not designated (N of step S1112), the process of step S1116 is executed. In step S1116, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determining random number (step S1116). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the non-probable variable symbol at the time of the change stop using the non-probable variable symbol selection table shown in FIG. 104 according to the extracted random number value (step S1117). As shown in FIG. 104, in the non-probable variable symbol selection table, the number of determination values distributed to each non-probable variable symbol is non-uniform. Therefore, the rate at which a specific non-probable variation symbol is determined is higher than other non-probability variation symbols.

  If the effect mode is the chance mode in step S1111 (Y in step S1111), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the pre-change start symbol (also referred to as the pre-change appearance). A determination process is executed (step S1118).

  In this embodiment, the pre-variation symbol determination process in step S1118 is the same process as step S1013 in FIG. 42, step S1065 in FIG. 60, and step S1108 in FIG. 101 (that is, the process of the same subroutine). ). However, as the appearance type selection table used when selecting the type of pattern before starting the change (output type), the output type selection table shown in FIG. 53 when there is no reach and the reach type shown in FIG. Instead of using the output type selection table at the time of loss and the output type selection table at the probability variation big hit shown in FIG. 112, the output type selection table at the non-probability big hit (per product) shown in FIG. Use to select the type of pattern (start type) before the start of change. Note that, as shown in FIG. 111, in the outcome type selection table at the time of the non-probable big hit, no judgment value is assigned to “Three light bills” or “5 · 5 · 5”. Therefore, “Sanko Fuda” or “5/5/5” is not selected as the symbol before the start of change.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 executes a big hit time variable stop symbol determination process for determining a variable stop symbol at the time of big hit (stop symbol at the time of variable stop) (step S1119). The detailed contents of the big hit change stop symbol determination process will be described later (see FIGS. 117 to 119).

  113 and 114 are flowcharts showing the second decorative symbol determination process (step S626). The second decorative symbol determination process is performed when a variation pattern command of variation patterns 51 to 70 and 79 to 99 shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 (variation pattern for both probable big hit / normal big hit) is received. , A process executed when a symbol information designation command for designating a big hit of 15 rounds is received.

  In the second decorative symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first determines that the symbol information designation command is a probability variation big hit designation command (a probability variation big hit one designation command that designates that the stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop is a probability variation symbol ( 8C02 (H)) (step S671), and if it is a probability change big hit 1 designation command (Y in step S671), in steps S672 to S681, the decorative design derived and displayed is In step S672, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a probability variation jackpot determination flag indicating that the probability variation jackpot has been determined (the jackpot symbol at the time of stoppage of variation is a probability variation symbol) (step S672). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the current production mode. (Step S673) Whether or not the current production mode is the chance mode indicates whether or not the chance mode flag indicating that the production mode is in the chance mode is set. Confirm by checking.

  When the effect mode is not the chance mode but the normal effect mode (N in Step S673), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the execution of the re-drawing effect during the change is specified by the change pattern command. (Step S674). When execution of the re-drawing effect during variation is not specified by the variation pattern command (N in step S674), the process proceeds to step S678. When execution of the re-lottery effect during the change is specified by the change pattern command (Y in step S674), the re-lottery selection random number is extracted (step S675), and the re-lottery selection table corresponding to the change pattern is selected. (Step S676). Note that the table shown in FIGS. 106, 108, and 110 is used as the re-lottery selection table at the probability variation big hit. Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores a re-lottery pattern (provisional winning symbol) and a probable variation symbol using the re-lottery selection table corresponding to the variation pattern according to the extracted random number value (step S677).

  In step S678, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determining random number (step S678). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the relief effect is to be executed based on the contents of the already received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S679A). When the relief effect is not executed (N in step S679A), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the probability variable symbol selection table to determine and store the probability variable symbol at the time of the change stop (step S679B). The table shown in FIG. 103 is used as the probability variation symbol selection table.

  When executing the relief effect (Y in step S679A), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a temporary stop symbol determining random number (step S679C). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the pre-relief symbols and the post-relief symbols using the probability variation relief effect table shown in FIG. 115 in accordance with the extracted random number value (step S679D).

  Here, the “pre-relief symbol” refers to a symbol (here, a left-right symbol) that is temporarily stopped before the relief effect is executed. The “post-relief symbol” refers to a symbol that is derived and displayed after the relief effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 115, the table for determining the relief effect at the time of change is a table for determining a post-relief symbol (post-relief symbol table) and a table for determining a pre-relief symbol (here, left and right symbols) (pre-relief symbol). Design table). In the post-relief symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the probable variation symbols among the jackpot symbols. The pre-relief symbol table is a table when the post-relief symbol is “three”, a table when “five”, a table when “seven”, a table when “spring”, and a table of “summer” The table for the case and the table for the “winter” are divided. In each table included in the pre-relief symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the same probability variation symbol as the non-probability variation symbol and the post-relief symbol.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 first uses the post-relief symbol table to determine the symbol having the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S678 as the post-relief symbol (probability variation symbol). Then, using the pre-relief symbol table corresponding to the determined post-relief symbol, the effect control microcomputer 100 converts the determination value symbol that matches the random value extracted in step S679C to the pre-relief symbol (non-probable symbol or probability variable symbol). Design).

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the next symbol of the first frame of the pre-relief symbol (left and right symbols temporarily stopped before the relief effect) as the third temporary stop symbol (middle symbol temporarily stopped before the relief effect). Store (step S679E).

  For example, in step S679D, “three” is determined as the post-relief symbol and “four” is determined as the pre-relief symbol, using the probability change relief effect table, and in step S679E, the third temporary stop symbol is determined. It is assumed that “5” is automatically determined. In this case, the shift symbol “454” is temporarily stopped and displayed before the relief effect is executed. Then, the relief effect is executed, and the probability variation pattern “33 33” is derived and displayed as the post-relief symbol. As shown in FIG. 115, in the pre-relief symbol table, since many determination values are assigned to the same symbol as the determined post-relief symbol, for example, when the post-relief symbol is determined to be “three” The percentage of the pre-relief symbol is also determined as “three”.

  In step S679E, the third temporary stop symbol is a symbol next to the symbol before the relief, but may be a symbol next to two or more frames before the symbol before relief. In addition, the third temporary stop symbol is automatically determined to be the symbol of the next frame of the symbol before the rescue, but it may be selected based on a random number. In this case, any symbol that is not related to the symbol before repair can be determined as the third temporary stop.

  In step S673, when the effect mode is in the chance mode (Y in step S673), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the pre-change start symbol (also referred to as the pre-change appearance). A determination process is executed (step S680).

  In this embodiment, the pre-variation symbol determination process in step S680 is the same process as in step S1013 in FIG. 42 (ie, the same subroutine process). However, as the outcome type selection table used when selecting the type of pattern before the start of variation (outcome type), instead of using the outcome type selection table shown in FIG. The pattern type (starting type) before starting the change is selected using the winning type selection table at the probability variation big hit shown in FIG.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 executes a big hit change stop symbol determination process for determining a change stop symbol at the time of big hit (stop symbol at the time of change stop) (step S681). The detailed contents of the big hit change stop symbol determination process will be described later (see FIGS. 117 to 119).

  In step S671, when the symbol information designation command is not the one command for the probable variation jackpot, that is, the normal jackpot designation command (8C01 (H)), the two probable jackpot designation command (8C03 (H)) or the three commands for the probable variation jackpot (8C04 ( H)) (N in step S671), in steps S686 to S695, the derived symbol to be displayed is determined to be any non-probable variable symbol.

  First, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether the symbol information designation command is a two-specific command (8C03 (H)) or a three-specific command (8C04 (H)) for the probability variation jackpot, that is, after the jackpot game is started. It is confirmed whether or not it is a symbol information designation command for designating execution of the re-lottery effect (step S682). When the symbol information designating command is the 2 command for probability variation big hit (8C03 (H)) or the 3 designation command for probability variation big hit (8C04 (H)) (Y in step S682), the production control microcomputer 100 starts the big hit game. A re-lottery effect execution flag indicating execution of the subsequent re-lottery effect is set (step S683). If it is a command with 2 probable big hits, a re-lottery effect execution flag is set to indicate that a re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big win. Set an ending re-lottery effect execution flag indicating that this is to be done. Then, the big hit symbol determination random number is extracted (step S684), and the probability variation symbol is determined and stored using the probability variation symbol selection table (FIG. 103) (step S685). The probability variation symbol determined in this way is a probability variation symbol derived and displayed in a re-lottery effect executed after the start of the big hit game (during round or ending). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S686. On the other hand, in step S682, when the symbol information designation command is not a two-probability jackpot designation command or a three-probability jackpot designation command (N in step S682), the symbol information designation command is a normal jackpot designation command (8C01 (H)). Become. In this case, the process proceeds to step S686 without executing the processes in steps S683 to S685.

  In step S686, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a non-probability variable jackpot determination flag indicating that the non-probable variable jackpot has been determined (the jackpot symbol at the time when the fluctuation is stopped is a non-probable variable symbol) (step S686). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the current production mode is the chance mode (step S687). When the effect mode is not in the chance mode (N in Step S687), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the changing lottery effect is specified by the change pattern command (Step S688). When execution of the re-drawing effect during variation is not designated by the variation pattern command (N in step S688), the process proceeds to step S692. When execution of the re-lottery effect during the change is specified by the change pattern command (Y in step S688), a re-lottery selection random number is extracted (step S689), and a re-lottery selection table corresponding to the change pattern is selected. (Step S690). Note that the table shown in FIGS. 105, 107 and 109 is used as the re-lottery selection table for the non-probable big hit. Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the re-lottery pattern (provisional winning symbol) and the non-probable variable symbol using the re-lottery selection table corresponding to the variation pattern according to the extracted random number value (step S691).

  In step S692, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determining random number (step S692). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the relief effect is to be executed based on the contents of the already received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S693A). When the relief effect is not executed (N in step S693A), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the non-probable variable symbol using the non-probable variable symbol selection table (step S693B). Note that the table shown in FIG. 104 is used as the uncertain variable symbol selection table.

  When executing the relief effect (Y in step S693A), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a temporary stop symbol determining random number (step S693C). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the pre-relief symbol and the post-relief symbol using the non-probability-variable relief effect table shown in FIG. 116 according to the extracted random number value (step S693D).

  As shown in FIG. 116, the non-probable change relief effect table includes a table for determining a post-relief symbol (post-relief symbol table) and a table for determining a pre-relief symbol (here, left and right symbols) (relief). The previous symbol table) is provided. In the post-relief symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to non-probable variation symbols among the big hit symbols. The pre-relief symbol table is a table when the post-relief symbol is “1”, a table when “2”, a table when “four”, a table when “six”, and a table of “eight” The table is divided into cases. In each table included in the pre-relief symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the non-probability variable symbols that are the same as the probability variable symbol and the post-relief symbol.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 first uses the post-relief symbol table to determine the symbol having the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S692 as the post-relief symbol (non-probable variation). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the pre-relief symbol table corresponding to the determined post-relief symbol table to convert the symbol having the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S693C to the pre-relief symbol (non-probable symbol or probability variable symbol). Design).

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the next symbol of the first frame of the pre-relief symbol (left and right symbols temporarily stopped before the relief effect) as the third temporary stop symbol (middle symbol temporarily stopped before the relief effect). Store (step S693E).

  For example, in step S693D, “six” is determined as the post-relief symbol and “two” is determined as the pre-relief symbol using the non-probability-change-relief effect table, and the third temporary stop symbol is determined in step S693E. It is assumed that “three” is automatically determined. In this case, the shift symbol “23 32” is temporarily stopped and displayed before the relief effect is executed. Then, the relief effect is executed, and the non-probable variation symbol “6666” is derived and displayed as the post-relief symbol. As shown in FIG. 116, in the pre-relief symbol table, since many determination values are assigned to the same symbol as the determined post-relief symbol, for example, when the post-relief symbol is determined to be “six” The ratio before the relief is also decided as “Six”.

  In step S693E, the third temporary stop symbol is a symbol that is one frame after the symbol before the relief, but may be a symbol that is two or more frames after the symbol before the relief. In addition, the third temporary stop symbol is automatically determined to be the symbol of the next frame of the symbol before the rescue, but it may be selected based on a random number. In this case, any symbol that is not related to the symbol before repair can be determined as the third temporary stop.

  In step S687, when the effect mode is in the chance mode (Y in step S687), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the pre-change start symbol (also referred to as the pre-change appearance). A determination process is executed (step S694).

  In this embodiment, the pre-variation symbol determination process in step S694 is a process having the same contents as in step S1013 in FIG. 42 (that is, the same subroutine process). However, as the outcome type selection table used when selecting the type of the pattern before starting change (outcome type), instead of using the outcome type selection table or the like at the time of no reach shown in FIG. The pattern type (starting type) before the start of change is selected using the leading type selection table at the time of non-probable large hit (per scrap).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 executes a big hit variation stop symbol determination process for determining a fluctuation stop symbol at the big hit (stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop) (step S695). The detailed contents of the big hit change stop symbol determination process will be described later (see FIGS. 117 to 119).

  117 to 119 are flowcharts showing the big hit time fluctuation stop symbol determination process. The big hit hour variation stop symbol determination process is executed as a subroutine of steps S1109, S1119, S681, and S695. In the big-hit fluctuation stop symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a big-hit symbol determination random number (step S1201). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the relief effect is to be executed based on the contents of the already received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S1202). When the relief effect is not executed (N in step S1202), the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether the big hit is a probable big hit (whether the stop symbol at the time of variable stop is a probable variable symbol) (step S1203A). ). Whether or not the probability variation jackpot is determined can be determined by whether or not the probability variation jackpot determination flag is set (or whether or not the non-probability variation jackpot determination flag is set).

  If it is a probable big hit (Y in step S1203A), the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the probable variable symbol using the probability variable symbol selection table (FIG. 103) (step S1203B). On the other hand, if it is not a probable big hit but a non-probable big hit (normal big hit) (N in step S1203A), the production control microcomputer 100 determines the non-probable variable symbol using the non-probable variable symbol selection table (FIG. 104). Store (step S1203C).

  When executing the relief effect (Y in step S1202), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a temporary stop symbol determining random number (step S1204A). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the big hit is a probable big hit (whether the stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop is a probable variable symbol) (step S1204B).

  If it is a probable big hit (Y in Step S1204B), the production control microcomputer 100 uses the random change values extracted in Steps S1201 and S1204A and uses the probable change relief effect table shown in FIG. A subsequent symbol is determined and stored (step S1204C).

  Specifically, the production control microcomputer 100 first uses the post-relief symbol table to determine a symbol having a determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1201 as a post-relief symbol (probability variation symbol). Then, using the pre-relief symbol table corresponding to the determined post-relief symbol, the effect control microcomputer 100 converts the symbol with the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1204A to the pre-relief symbol (non-probability variable or probability variable). Design).

  On the other hand, if it is not a probable big hit but a non-probable big hit (normal big hit) (N in step S1204B), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the non-probable change shown in FIG. 116 according to the random number values extracted in steps S1201 and S1204A. The pre-relief symbol and the post-relief symbol are determined and stored using the relief effect table (step S1204D).

  Specifically, the production control microcomputer 100 first uses the post-relief symbol table to determine a symbol having a determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1201 as a post-relief symbol (non-probable variation). Then, using the pre-relief symbol table corresponding to the determined post-relief symbol, the effect control microcomputer 100 converts the symbol with the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1204A to the pre-relief symbol (non-probability variable or probability variable). Design).

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the next symbol of the first frame of the pre-relief symbol (left and right symbols temporarily stopped before the relief effect) as the third temporary stop symbol (middle symbol temporarily stopped before the relief effect). Store (step S1204E).

  In step S1204E, the third temporary stop symbol is a symbol that is one frame after the symbol before the relief, but may be a symbol that is two or more frames after the symbol before the relief. In addition, the third temporary stop symbol is automatically determined to be the symbol of the next frame of the symbol before the rescue, but it may be selected based on a random number. In this case, any symbol that is not related to the symbol before repair can be determined as the third temporary stop.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a random number for selecting the type of change item on the way of change (step S1205), and changes the output in accordance with the contents of the change pattern and the type of jackpot (whether it is a probable big hit or a non-probable big hit). An eye type selection table is selected (step S1206). The table used in the variation stop symbol determination process when reaching and losing (FIGS. 65 to 72) can be used as the variation type selection table during the variation. However, the distribution ratios of the determination values for the types of changes appearing in each table may be different. As described above, if the distribution rate of the determination values for the types of the midway change in each table is made different, it is possible to make a big hit notice according to the midway change. In addition, in the tables shown in FIGS. 65 to 72, since the determination value is not assigned to the “deer head”, it is changed by assigning the determination value to the “deer head” in the table used in the big hit. By making the “deer head” appearance appear as an intermediate outcome, the player can recognize the big hit confirmation. In addition, by assigning a judgment value to “Deer Lead” in the table used for the probability change big hit, the player can recognize the probability change big hit decision by causing the “deer head” to appear as an intermediate change. Will be able to.

  The production control microcomputer 100 selects the changing middle type according to the random number extracted in step S1205, using the changing middle type selection table selected in step S1206 (step S1207).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the type of the change halfway item selected in step S1207 is “normal” (step S1208). If it is “normal”, the symbol in the middle of the change from the normal change is not temporarily displayed, and the normal reach is developed. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a tempering motion selection random number (step S1209). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a template operation selection table corresponding to the variation pattern (step S1210). As the tempered movement selection table, the tables (FIGS. 73 to 76) used in the variable stop symbol determination process when reaching and losing can be used. However, the distribution ratio of the judgment value for the tempering operation in each table may be different. As described above, if the distribution ratios of the determination values for the tempering operation in each table are made different, it is possible to make a big hit notice by the tempering operation.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a tempered motion using the tempered motion selection table selected in step S1210 in accordance with the random number value extracted in step S1209 (step S1211).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a pattern selection random number (step S1212), and according to the extracted random number value, the pattern selection table is used as a pattern of the tempering operation, pattern 1 (P1) or pattern 2 (P2). ) Is selected (step S1213). As the pattern selection table, it is possible to use the table (FIG. 77) used in the variable stop symbol determination process when reaching and losing. However, the distribution ratio of the determination values for each pattern (P1, P2) in the table may be different. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a symbol transition pattern determination table for determining a symbol transition pattern based on the template operation selected in step S1211 (step S1214). As the symbol transition pattern determination table, the tables shown in FIGS. 78 to 82 can be used.

  Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a symbol transition pattern using the selected symbol transition pattern determination table (step S1215).

  In step S1208, when the type of the result in the middle of the change is not “normal” (N in step S1208), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a tempo motion selection random number (step S1216). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the type of the turn-out item is “three-way bill” (step S1217). If it is a “three-light bill” (Y in step S1217), the production control microcomputer 100 selects the tempered action selection table for the chance eye A according to the variation pattern (step S1218A). The table shown in FIGS. 83 to 86 can be used as the tempo operation selection table for the chance eye A. It should be noted that the distribution ratio of the determination values for the tempering operation in each table (FIGS. 85 and 86) may be varied.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a tempering operation using the tempering operation selection table for the chance eye A selected in step S1218A according to the random value extracted in step S1216 (step S1219A).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye selection random number (step S1220A). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye A using the chance eye A selection table according to the extracted random number value (step S1221A). As the chance eye A selection table, the table shown in FIG. 87 can be used. Note that the distribution ratios of determination values for chance eyes A in the table shown in FIG. 87 may be different.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a pattern selection random number (step S1222A), and according to the extracted random number value, a pattern A (PA) or a pattern B (PB) is used as a pattern of the template operation using the pattern selection table. ) Is selected (step S1223A). As the pattern selection table, the table shown in FIG. 88 can be used. However, the distribution ratio of the determination values for each pattern (P1, P2) in the table may be different. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a symbol transition pattern determination table for determining the symbol transition pattern based on the template operation selected in step S1219A (step S1224A). As the symbol transition pattern determination table, the tables shown in FIGS. 89 to 91 can be used.

  Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a symbol transition pattern using the selected symbol transition pattern determination table (step S1225A).

  In step S1217, if the type of the midway change is not “three-way bill” (N in step S1217), the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the type of the midway change is “猪 / deer / butterfly (deer head or It is determined that it is “other than deer head”. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the tempered movement selection table for the chance eye B according to the variation pattern (step S1218B). The table shown in FIGS. 92 to 95 can be used as the tempered movement selection table for the chance eye B. It should be noted that the distribution ratio of determination values for the tempering operation in each table (FIGS. 94 and 95) may be different.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a tempering action using the selected tempering action selection table for the chance eye B according to the random number value extracted in step S1216 (step S1219B).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye selection random number (step S1220B). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye B using the chance eye B selection table according to the extracted random number value (step S1221B). As the chance eye B selection table, the table shown in FIG. 96 can be used. Note that the distribution ratio of the determination value for the chance item B in the table shown in FIG. 96 may be varied.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a pattern selection random number (step S1222B), and according to the extracted random number value, a pattern A (PA) or a pattern B (PB) is used as a template operation pattern using the pattern selection table. ) Is selected (step S1223B). As the pattern selection table, the table shown in FIG. 97 can be used. However, the distribution ratio of the determination values for each pattern (P1, P2) in the table may be different. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a symbol transition pattern determination table for determining a symbol transition pattern based on the template operation selected in step S1219B (step S1224B). As the symbol transition pattern determination table, the tables shown in FIGS. 98 to 100 can be used.

  Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a symbol transition pattern using the selected symbol transition pattern determination table (step S1225B).

  FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the provisionally determined symbol determination process (step S632). In the tentatively determined symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first executes a non-probable variation symbol determination process (step S632A). The non-probable variable symbol determination process is the same process as the process described with reference to FIG. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a command non-reception flag indicating that the symbol information designation command has not been received (is missed) (step S632B). Then, the process ends.

  FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the second probability variation design determination process (step S637). In the second probability variable design determination process, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S637A), and determines and stores the probability variable symbol using the probability variable symbol selection table according to the extracted random value. (Step S637B). The probability variation symbol determined in this manner is a probability variation symbol derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect after the big hit game. Note that the table shown in FIG. 103 can be used as the probability variation symbol selection table.

  FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process. In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs one of steps S800 to S808 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) specifying a fluctuation pattern has been received by the command reception interrupt process. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern reception flag indicating that a variation pattern command has been received is set. The variation pattern reception flag is set in step S618 in the command analysis process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Decoration symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol is started. In addition, a value corresponding to the variation time is set in the variation time timer, the process table to be used is selected, and the process timer setting value set at the beginning of the process table is set in the process timer.

  Decoration symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time.

  Decoration symbol variation stop process (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the ornament symbol and to derive and display the stop symbol (definite symbol) in response to the time-out of the variation time timer.

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, the big hit display is controlled. For example, when a fanfare command designating the start of a big hit is received, a fanfare effect is executed. Also, when a fanfare command designating sudden start of a probable big hit is received, a two-round effect is executed.

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. For example, when a command for opening a special prize opening indicating that the special prize opening is being opened is received, display control of the number of rounds is performed. A re-lottery effect may be executed during a predetermined round. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the round in which the redrawing effect is executed is determined in advance (for example, 7 rounds or 15 rounds).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a command after opening the big prize opening indicating that the big prize opening is after being opened (closed) is received, an interval display or the like is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): Control of the big hit end display after the big hit game ends. For example, when an ending command specifying the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. Note that a re-lottery effect may be executed during the ending effect.

  Small hit effect processing (step S808): After receiving the fanfare command designating the start of the small hit after the end of the variation time, the two round effect, which is the effect during the small hit, is executed.

  FIG. 123 is a timing chart showing the development timing of reach and relief effects. As shown in FIG. 123, only the “normal fluctuation” is performed in the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation (the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 1 in FIG. 14). Specifically, when the decorative design starts to change, the rate of change is gradually increased from the state in which the left, middle, and right decorative designs are stopped, and the change is performed for a predetermined time while the change rate is high. Thereafter, the fluctuating speed is decreased in the order of the first stop symbol, the second stop symbol, and the third stop symbol (final stop symbol), and the decorative symbol is stopped. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern of the short-time normal fluctuation (the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 2 in FIG. 14) has a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation (variation pattern of fluctuation number 1 in FIG. 14). For example, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation (the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 1 in FIG. 14) is 8 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of the short-time normal fluctuation (variation pattern of fluctuation number 2 in FIG. 14) is 4. Seconds. Further, in the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation of the sliding gaze (the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation numbers 3 to 6 in FIG. 14), the second stop symbol is temporarily stopped after the first stop symbol is stopped, and then the second stop symbol is predetermined. Only the effect of stopping by sliding the number of frames is performed, and other than that, it is the same as the normal fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 1 in FIG. 14).

  It should be noted that the variation of the decorative pattern in this embodiment is performed by rotating the decorative pattern (specifically, the tag on which the decorative pattern is drawn) at the same position and switching the pattern one after another. Therefore, as the decorative symbol rotation speed (switching speed) changes, the decorative symbol variation speed also changes.

  In this embodiment, not only the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation without the reach but also the fluctuation pattern with the reach is a normal fluctuation (high-speed fluctuation of the left middle right decorative pattern) in a predetermined period (for example, 8 seconds) from the start of the fluctuation. And then develop into normal reach. That is, in the variation pattern with normal reach (variation patterns of variation numbers 7 to 15 and 43 to 50 in FIG. 14), after the “normal variation” is performed for a predetermined period, the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are aligned. Reach, and “normal reach” changes. It should be noted that the period during which the “normal reach” change is executed is, for example, 6 seconds.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the number of sliding frames is also specified in the variation pattern command of the variation pattern with reach. Therefore, in the normal variation, the slip effect (the second stop symbol temporarily stops at a different symbol from the first stop symbol after the first stop symbol stops, and then the second stop symbol slips a predetermined number of frames to the first stop symbol) The effect of stopping with the same design as in (1) may or may not be executed, and the number of frames to be slipped in the sliding effect varies depending on the variation pattern. However, in this embodiment, all the fluctuations from the start of fluctuation to the establishment of normal reach are all normal fluctuations regardless of whether or not the slip effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, not only the variation pattern with normal reach but also the variation pattern with super reach, the “normal reach” is performed for a predetermined period after the “normal variation” is performed for a predetermined period, and then the super reach is performed. Develop. That is, in a fluctuation pattern (variation patterns of fluctuation numbers 16 to 27, 51, 52, and 54 in FIG. 14) accompanied by super reach A (also referred to as reach 1-1), “normal fluctuation” is a predetermined period (for example, 8 seconds). After being performed, the variation of “normal reach” is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds), and the variation of “super reach A” is performed by developing into “super reach A”. Further, even in a variation pattern (variation patterns 28 to 31, 55, 56, 58 to 62 in FIG. 14) accompanied by super reach B (also referred to as reach 2-1), the “normal variation” has a predetermined period (for example, 8). Seconds), the “normal reach” change is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds), and then the “super reach B” is developed to change the “super reach B”. As shown in FIG. 123, the period in which the “super reach B” variation is executed is longer than the period in which the “super reach A” variation is performed. In addition, although not shown in FIG. 123, the “normal variation” is also predetermined for the variation pattern accompanied by super reach C (variation patterns of variation numbers 32 to 42, 63, 64, and 66 to 70 in FIG. 14). After the period (for example, 8 seconds) is performed, the variation of “normal reach” is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds), and the variation to “super reach C” is performed and the variation of “super reach C” is performed.

  In this embodiment, in the variation pattern with super reach including the relief effect, the relief effect is executed after the super reach variation is performed for a predetermined period. That is, in the variation pattern with super reach A including the relief effect (variation pattern of variation number 53 in FIG. 14), the variation of “super reach A” is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the pattern that is out of reach is temporarily assumed. The stop effect is displayed, and then the relief effect is executed, and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, even in a variation pattern with a super reach B including a relief effect (a variation pattern of variation number 57 in FIG. 14), after the “super reach B” variation is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 13 seconds), the reach-removed symbol is temporarily displayed. The stop effect is displayed, and then the relief effect is executed, and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Note that, although not shown in FIG. 123, for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach C (the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 65 in FIG. 14), the fluctuation of “super reach C” is similarly performed for a predetermined period (eg, 15 seconds). After reaching, the reach-removed symbol is displayed in a temporary stop, and then the relief effect is executed, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 124 is a timing chart showing the variation timing in the variation pattern with normal reach. In the fluctuation pattern with normal reach, “normal fluctuation” is first performed. That is, the fluctuation speed is gradually increased from the state in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped, and the fluctuation is performed for a predetermined time while the fluctuation speed is high. First, the fluctuation speed becomes lower than the symbol two frames before the first stop symbol, and the fluctuation is started by stopping at the first stop symbol. Next, a symbol before a predetermined frame of the second stop symbol (for example, a symbol two frames before the second stop symbol; the number of frames to be advanced after the fluctuation speed becomes low is changed according to the number of sliding frames of the fluctuation pattern. From the second stop symbol, and the fluctuation fluctuation is started. At this time, when the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol stop at the same symbol, reach is established, and normal reach variation is started. Finally, the symbol before the predetermined frame of the third stop symbol (final stop symbol) (the symbol before the fixed frame of the reach symbol (for example, the same seven frames)); for example, the symbol difference of the third stop symbol with respect to the reach symbol indicated by the variation pattern If the symbol is (-2), the symbol is 5 frames before the 3rd stop symbol, and if the symbol difference between the 3rd stop symbol and the reach symbol indicated by the variation pattern is (+1), the symbol is 8 frames before the 3rd stop symbol. ), The fluctuating speed becomes low and stops at the third stop symbol. As shown in FIG. 124, when the normal variation and the normal reach variation are performed, the background color of the background image on the display screen of the variable display device 9 is always the same color (for example, blue) and does not change. The variation pattern of the variation pattern with normal reach will be described in detail later (see FIG. 158; the first embodiment is a one-line effect, whereas the third embodiment (FIG. 158) has five lines. Shows the case of production).

  FIG. 125 is a timing chart showing variation timings in a variation pattern involving super reach (super A or super B). Even in a fluctuation pattern with super reach, “normal fluctuation” is first performed. That is, the fluctuation speed is gradually increased from the state in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped, and the fluctuation is performed for a predetermined time while the fluctuation speed is high. First, the fluctuation speed becomes lower than the symbol two frames before the first stop symbol, and the fluctuation is started by stopping at the first stop symbol. Next, the fluctuation speed is reduced from the symbol before the predetermined frame of the second stop symbol, and the fluctuation is started by stopping at the second stop symbol. At this time, when the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol stop at the same symbol, reach is established, and normal reach variation is started. Then, the third stop symbol (final stop symbol) becomes slower than the symbol of the predetermined frame before the temporary stop symbol (for example, eight frames before the temporary stop symbol), and the temporary stop symbol temporarily stops at the temporary stop symbol. Is called.

  In this embodiment, the temporary stop symbol of the third stop symbol is a symbol next to the reach symbol (first stop symbol, second stop symbol). For example, when the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are the same symbol “seven” and reach is established, the temporary stop symbol of the third stop symbol to be temporarily stopped is “seven” one frame next symbol “eight”. It becomes. That is, the third stop symbol “eight” that constitutes the jackpot symbol in combination with the reach symbol passes the stop position (composition position of the big hit symbol) by one frame and then the third stop symbol “eight” temporarily stops (specifically The symbol “seven” rotates and turns to the front, passes, the symbol “seven” turns to the back, the symbol “eight” turns to the front, and stops as it is).

  After that, the third stop symbol fluctuates for a short time and then starts to fluctuate again. The timing at which the third stop symbol temporarily stopped in this way starts re-variation is the “timing to develop into super reach”. When re-variation of the third stop symbol is started, the variation speed is increased and high-speed variation is performed. When the normal variation and the normal reach variation are performed, the background color of the background image on the display screen of the variable display device 9 is blue, but the background color is changed from blue to black at the timing when the medium symbol is re-varied. To change. At this timing, the sound effect (fluctuating sound) and the lighting mode (lighting pattern) of the lamp / LED also change. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the game has evolved into super reach.

  Then, after high-speed fluctuation is performed for a predetermined period and the background color of the background image changes from black to red (which may be different depending on the fluctuation pattern (super reach A to C)), the player is expected to win a big hit. Production of tilting action to be held is executed. The direction of the tilt movement differs between Super Reach A and Super Reach B. Note that the effect of the tilt operation in the variation pattern with super reach A and B will be described in detail later (see FIGS. 159 and 161; the first embodiment is a case of a one-line effect). Form 3 (FIGS. 159 and 161) shows a case of a 5-line effect).

  In the above example, after the fluctuation of normal reach is started, the third stop symbol is slowed down from the symbol before the temporary stop symbol by a fixed number of frames (for example, the symbol eight frames before the temporary stop symbol). However, the fluctuation speed may be reduced from the symbol immediately before the temporary stop symbol by an arbitrary number of frames determined by lottery. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may determine the number of frames that the middle symbol advances after normal reach is established based on a predetermined random number, or the game control microcomputer 560 may It is also possible to determine the number of frames that the middle symbol advances after normal reach is established based on a predetermined random number, and to specify the determined number of frames with a variation pattern command.

  In the above example, the timing at which the temporarily stopped third stop symbol starts re-variation is “timing to develop into super reach”. However, the present invention is not limited to such a case. For example, the symbol for starting re-variation may be another symbol (the first stop symbol or the second stop symbol) instead of the third stop symbol (final stop symbol), All the symbols may be changed again. In addition, when the third stop symbol was temporarily stopped when it was developed to super reach, it was re-varied, but the fluctuation rate of the third stop symbol was temporarily reduced, and the third stop symbol was not temporarily stopped. Thereafter, the speed may be increased again and then developed into super reach. In this case, the timing at which the fluctuating speed once reduced is increased again is “timing to develop into super reach”. Furthermore, the timing at which effects such as “background image”, “illuminant” such as lamp / LED, and “sound effect” change may be set as “timing to develop into super reach”. Thus, the “timing to develop into super reach” is a timing at which at least one of a variation speed of a predetermined symbol and a rendering mode in a predetermined rendering device is changed in a manner that can be recognized by the player. Is defined.

  In addition, as a specific example in which the symbol for starting re-variation is a symbol other than the third stop symbol (final stop symbol) (second stop symbol), the first change is made after the normal variation is performed for a predetermined period. For example, the stop symbol is stopped at “seven”, the second stop symbol is stopped at “three”, and the third stop symbol is stopped at “seven” (for example, “773”). Then, the second stop symbol “three” re-varies and develops into super reach, and whether or not the second stop symbol stops at “seven” (whether or not it is a big hit) is executed in the super reach. Is done. In addition, as a specific example in which the symbol for starting re-variation is set to another symbol (first stop symbol) other than the third stop symbol (final stop symbol), the first variation is performed after the normal variation is performed for a predetermined period. For example, the stop symbol stops at “seven”, the second stop symbol stops at “three”, and the third stop symbol stops at “three” (for example, “seven-three three”). Then, the first stop symbol is re-variable to develop into super reach, and a tilt effect is executed in the super reach whether or not the first stop symbol stops at “three” (whether or not it is a big hit).

  FIG. 126 is a timing chart showing the variation timing in the variation pattern with the super reach including the relief effect (super reach A or super reach B including the relief effect). Even in a variation pattern with super reach including a relief effect, “normal variation” is first performed. That is, the fluctuation speed is gradually increased from the state in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped, and the fluctuation is performed for a predetermined time while the fluctuation speed is high. First, the fluctuation speed becomes lower than the symbol two frames before the first stop symbol, and the fluctuation is started by stopping at the first stop symbol. Next, the fluctuation speed is reduced from the symbol before the predetermined frame of the second stop symbol, and the fluctuation is started by stopping at the second stop symbol. At this time, when the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol stop at the same symbol, reach is established, and normal reach variation is started. Then, the third stop symbol becomes a low speed from the symbol of a predetermined frame before the temporary stop symbol (for example, eight frames before the temporary stop symbol), the temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped, and the fluctuation is changed. As described above, in this embodiment, the temporary stop symbol of the third stop symbol is a symbol next to the reach symbol.

  After that, the third stop symbol fluctuates for a short time and then starts to fluctuate again. When the re-change of the third stop symbol is started and the change of the super reach is started, the change speed is increased and the high-speed change is performed. In addition, the background color on the display screen of the variable display device 9 changes from blue to black at the timing when the third stop symbol is re-varied.

  Then, after the high-speed fluctuation is performed for a predetermined period and the background color of the background image changes from black to red, the effect of the tilt operation that causes the player to have a big hit expectation is executed. The direction of the tilt movement differs between Super Reach A and Super Reach B. After the tilting operation is performed, a symbol that is not a symbol constituting the jackpot symbol in combination with the reach symbol (for example, when the reach symbol is “seven”, the symbol “eight”) temporarily stops as the third stop symbol (note that In this case, “7” is the pre-relief symbol and “8” is the third temporary stop symbol (the temporary stop symbol of the third stop symbol). When this symbol is determined as the stop symbol, the reach deviation is determined. However, in the case of a variation based on the variation pattern including the relief effect, the relief effect is executed without determining the stop symbol. At this time, the background color of the background image changes from red to rainbow (rainbow). If the same symbol “7” as the pre-relief symbol “7” is determined as the after-relief symbol, the reach-removed symbol is replaced with a jackpot symbol in the relief effect (for example, when the reach symbol is “seven”). (3) The temporary stop symbol “eight” is replaced with the final stop symbol “seven”) and the jackpot is confirmed. Relief effects differ between Super Reach A and Super Reach B. The effect mode of the relief effect will be described later in detail (see FIGS. 160 and 162; the first embodiment is a case of a one-line effect, whereas the third embodiment (FIGS. 160 and 162). Shows the case of a 5-line production).

  In the case of fluctuation in a fluctuation pattern including a re-drawing effect during fluctuation, after the non-probability variable symbol is temporarily stopped as a jackpot symbol, a non-probability symbol is expected to be promoted to a non-probable symbol, A probability variation symbol or a probability variation symbol is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 127 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, each variation mode constituting the variation pattern is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the change mode. The effect control microcomputer 100 refers to the process table, and performs control for variably displaying the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  Similarly to the control based on the display control execution data, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the lighting state of various lamps based on the lamp control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and the sound number Data is output to the audio output board 70.

  For example, the normal reach variation pattern includes process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data) for executing normal variation and process data for executing normal reach variation, In the case of the reach fluctuation pattern, the process data for executing the normal fluctuation, the process data for executing the normal reach fluctuation, and the process data for executing the predetermined super reach fluctuation are included, and the relief effect is included. In the case of the super reach variation pattern, the process data for executing the normal variation, the process data for executing the normal reach variation, the process data for executing the predetermined super reach variation, and the predetermined relief effect are executed. Including lottery process data In the case of a variation pattern of super reach including process data for executing normal variation, process data for executing variation of normal reach, process data for executing variation of predetermined super reach, and predetermined re-drawing effect And process data for executing.

  The process data shown in FIG. 127 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is selected (see step S821), and the rendering device is according to the process data set in the selected process table. (Step S823, etc.), but in the effect mode to be executed next when the process data is switched (for example, which super reach is executed, the relief effect is executed, or the re-lottery effect is executed) The corresponding process data may be selected (see step S835 or the like), and the rendering device may be controlled according to the selected process data.

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S811). If it has been set, the flag is reset (step S812). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a decorative pattern variation pattern based on the content (variation time) designated by the variation pattern command (step S813). Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S814).

  FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first selects process data corresponding to the decorative symbol variation pattern to be used (step S821). Then, the process timer set value in the selected process data 1 is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S822). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the production device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step S823). For example, a control signal is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the variable display device 9. Further, a control signal is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform various lamp on / off control. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 starts a variation time timer (a timer according to the variation time of the decorative symbol) (step S824), and the value of the effect control process flag indicates the decorative symbol variation process (step S802). The value is updated (step S825).

  FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation processing, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the variation time timer has timed out (step S831). If the variation time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value indicating the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S838).

  If the variation time timer has not timed out, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the process timer by 1 (step S832) and decrements the variation time timer by 1 (step S833). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes control of the effect device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data n (step S834). In addition, the microcomputer 100 for effect control of the effect device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the content of the process data for executing the re-draw effect (process data including the re-draw effect). By executing the control, the re-drawing effect during the change is executed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S835). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S836). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S837).

  FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation stop process, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not an effect control command (decorative symbol stop designation command) for instructing the decorative symbol variation stop is received (step S841). If the decorative symbol stop designation command has been received, control is performed to stop and display the decorative symbol stop symbol stored in the command analysis process (step S842).

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to stop and display the decorative symbols in response to the reception of the decorative symbol stop designation command from the game control microcomputer 560. The present invention is not limited to this, and control for stopping and displaying decorative symbols may be performed based on the time-up of the variable time timer.

  When the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in step S842 is a small hit symbol (Y in step S843), the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the small hit fanfare reception flag is set. (Step S844). When the small hitting fanfare reception flag is set (Y in step S844), the effect control microcomputer 100 selects a two-round effect based on the contents of the stored fanfare command (step S845). . Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects process data corresponding to the selected effect for the two rounds (step S846). Then, the process timer is started (step S847), and the 2R effect time timer for measuring the execution time of the 2-round effect is started (step S848). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit effect process (step S808) (step S849).

  When the stop symbol of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in step S842 is not a big hit symbol but a big hit symbol (non-probable variation symbol, probability variation symbol, sudden probability variation symbol) (Y in step S850), the production control microcomputer 100 uses Then, it is confirmed whether or not the fanfare reception flag is set (step S851). When the fanfare reception flag is set (Y in step S851), the production control microcomputer 100 selects either the fanfare production or the 2-round production based on the contents of the stored fanfare command (step S851). S852). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects process data corresponding to the selected fanfare effect or two-round effect (step S853). Then, the process timer is started (step S854), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S855).

  If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in step S850 is not a jackpot symbol (non-probable variation symbol, probability variation symbol, or sudden probability variation symbol), that is, if it is an outlier symbol (N in step S850), the effect control microcomputer 100 resets a predetermined flag (step S856). For example, when a flag corresponding to the decorative symbol stop designation command is set, such a flag is reset. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S857).

  FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the big hit display process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open command has been received is set (step S901). The special winning opening open flag is set in the command analysis process (see step S645). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S901), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S902), and the production device (in accordance with the contents of the process data n) Control of the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S903). For example, in the case of 15 rounds of big hit, the variable display device 9 displays a big hit display symbol and executes an effect of displaying characters or characters indicating that a big hit has occurred. Further, for example, in the effect for two rounds, an effect for displaying special characters or characters is executed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S906).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S901), the production control microcomputer 100 produces an in-round production (the number of rounds) based on the contents of the big prize opening open command for 15 rounds. An effect for executing the corresponding round display is selected (step S907). When a command for opening a special prize opening for 2 rounds is received, there is no need to newly select a production since the production for 2 rounds is continuously executed during the round, but 2 for each round. When switching the effect included in the performance for round (for example, when switching the display screen of the effect for two rounds), the effect included in the effect for two rounds may be newly selected for each round. . Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S908), and process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S909). Then, the process timer is started (step S910), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the mid-round process (step S805) (step S911).

  FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the in-round processing (step S805) in the effect control process. In the in-round processing, first, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not a flag after opening the big prize opening indicating that a command after opening the special prize opening has been received is set (step S921). Note that the flag after opening the special winning opening is set in the command analysis process (see step S645). When the flag for opening the big prize opening is not set (N in step S921), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S922), and the production device (in accordance with the contents of the process data n) Control of the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S923). For example, the variable display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and executes an effect of displaying characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, and the like. Moreover, in the effect for two rounds, the effect which displays a special character, a character, etc. is performed. When a re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big hit game (when the big lottery re-draw lottery execution flag is set), a predetermined round (for example, 7 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.) A re-lottery effect is executed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S924), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S925). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S926).

  When the flag after opening the big prize opening is set in step S921 (Y in step S921), the production control microcomputer 100 performs interval production (according to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the command after opening the big prize opening. An effect for performing interval display is selected (step S928). In addition, when the command after opening the grand prize opening for 2 rounds is received, there is no need to newly select an effect since the effect for 2 rounds is continuously executed after the round, but 2 rounds after the round. When switching the effect included in the effect for the second time (for example, when switching the display screen of the effect for two rounds), the effect included in the effect for the second round may be newly selected after the round. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the flag after the special winning opening is opened (step S928), and selects process data corresponding to the selected interval effect (step S929). Then, the process timer is started (step S930), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S806) (step S931).

  134 and 135 are flowcharts showing post-round processing (step S806) in the effect control process. In the round post-processing, the effect control microcomputer 100 first checks whether the ending flag is set (step S940). When the ending flag is not set (N in step S940), the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open command has been received is set. Confirmation is made (step S941). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S941), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S942), and the production device (in accordance with the contents of the process data n) Control of the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S943).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S944), and switches the process data if the process timer has timed out (step S945). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S946).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S941), the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether it is necessary to execute the re-lottery production during the big hit (during the round) ( Step S947). Specifically, when the big hit re-lottery execution flag or the big hit mid-relottering effect execution flag is set (when the re-lottery effect is executed in a predetermined round), the re-lottery effect during the big hit Is determined to be necessary.

  When it is determined that it is necessary to execute the re-lottery effect during the big hit (and in the round in which the re-lottery effect is executed) (Y in step S947), the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the re-lottery effect. An effect during the round is selected (step S948). Then, a re-lottery execution completion flag is set (step S949). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not necessary to execute the re-lottery effect during the big hit (N in Step S947), the mid-round effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is selected (Step S950).

  Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S951), and process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S952). Then, the process timer is started (step S953), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S954).

  When the ending reception flag is set in step S940 (Y in step S940), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a re-lottery effect needs to be executed during the ending effect (step S955). Specifically, when the ending re-lottery execution flag or the ending re-lottery execution execution flag is set, and even if the big hit mid-relot lottery execution flag or the big hit mid-relottery execution execution flag is set, If the re-lottery executed flag indicating that the lottery effect has been executed during the big hit (during the round) is not set (see step S949), it is determined that the re-lottery effect needs to be executed during the ending effect.

  If it is determined that the re-lottery effect needs to be executed during the ending effect (Y in step S955), the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the ending effect for executing the re-lottery effect (step S956). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not necessary to execute the re-lottery effect during the ending effect (N in step S955), an ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is selected (step S957).

  Here, the execution time of the ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is made shorter than the execution time of the ending effect that executes the re-lottery effect. For example, the execution time of the ending effect that executes the re-lottery effect is 10 seconds, and the execution time of the ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is 3 seconds. By setting in this way, it is possible to avoid that the effect is unnecessarily executed for a long time when it is not necessary to notify the transition to the probability changing state.

  When selecting an ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect in step S957, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit with a flag (probable big hit decision flag, normal big hit decision flag). Choose different ending effects depending on whether you are a big hit or a normal big hit. For example, in the case of a probable big hit, an effect that informs the player that the game will change to a probable state after the big hit is over (instead of notifying that the player is promoted from a non-probable variable symbol to a probable symbol like the re-lottery effect, Select an ending effect that executes an effect that informs the transition to a probabilistic state based on the normal), and in the case of a big hit, select an ending effect that executes an effect that informs the player that it will shift to the short state after the big hit To do.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the ending reception flag (step S958), and selects process data corresponding to the ending effect (step S959). Then, the process timer is started (step S960), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect process (step S807) (step S961).

  FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S971), and controls the effect device (variable display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n. Execute (Step S972). For example, when the end of the big hit is displayed, or when a re-lottery effect is included in the ending effect, the re-lottery effect is executed.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S973), and if the process timer has timed out, a predetermined flag (probability big hit decision flag, normal big hit decision flag, Suddenly probable big hit decision flag, big hit re-lottery execution flag, ending re-lottery execution flag, etc.) are reset (step S974), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800). Setting is made (step S975).

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the small hit effect process (step S808) in the effect control process. In the small hit effect process, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S981), and controls the effect device (variable display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n. Execute (step S982). Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the 2R effect time timer (step S983).

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the 2R production time timer has timed out (step S984). If not timed out, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S985). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S986). . Then, the process timer is started (step S987).

  If the 2R effect time timer has timed out (Y in step S984), the effect control microcomputer 100 resets a predetermined flag (such as a small hit flag) (step S988), and sets the value of the effect control process flag. A value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) is set (step S989).

  Next, an effect mode of the re-lottery effect of the jackpot symbol executed in the variable display device 9 will be described. FIG. 138 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of a re-lottery effect of jackpot symbol executed in the variable display device. The display effect as illustrated in FIG. 138 is executed based on the effect control command sent from the game control microcomputer 560 by the effect control microcomputer 100. In addition, the display example in FIG. 138 shows a case where the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending effect.

  In this embodiment, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives a variation pattern command other than the variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot (N in step S619), based on the received variation pattern command, The off, big hit, small hit, and big hit types are determined, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined according to the type (step S620, FIG. 41). On the other hand, when a variation pattern command for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit is received (Y in step S619), it is determined whether it is a promising big hit or normal big hit based on the symbol information designation command received thereafter, and a decoration corresponding to it A symbol stop symbol is determined (step S626, FIG. 113).

  However, the effect control microcomputer 100 may miss the symbol information designation command even though it has received the variation pattern command for both the normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 cannot determine whether the probable big hit or the normal big hit, and cannot determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit type. Therefore, if a symbol information designation command is missed despite receiving a normal big hit / probability big hit variation pattern command (Y in step S629, N in S630, N in S631), a temporary stop display is made. A non-probable variable symbol is determined as a decorative symbol stop symbol (step S632, FIG. 120). In this way, the non-probable variation symbol is determined because, after the non-probability variation symbol is derived and displayed at the end of the decoration symbol variation, if it is determined that the big hit type is a probabilistic large defeat, the subsequent re-drawing effect is not used. You can promote a probabilistic symbol to a probabilistic symbol, but if you determine that the jackpot type is a normal jackpot after deriving and displaying the probable symbol at the end of the decorative symbol variation, you must demote the probabilistic symbol to a non-probable symbol. This is because such effects may discourage the player and reduce the interest of the game.

  In the example of FIG. 138, when the symbol information designation command is missed even though the variation pattern command for normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot is received, the non-probability variation symbol “44-4” is used as the stop symbol for the decoration symbol. Temporarily determined, and the non-probability variable symbol “44-4” is derived and displayed (temporary stop display) at the end of the decorative symbol variation. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the re-lottery effect should be executed after the big hit based on the content of the fanfare command (steps S635 and S636), and determines that the re-lottery effect should be executed. At that time, the probability variation symbol derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect after the big hit is determined (step S637), and the timing for executing the re-lottery effect is determined (steps S638 to S642). In the example of FIG. 138, it is assumed that the re-lottery effect is determined to be executed during the ending effect.

  As shown in FIG. 138, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the big hit game based on the reception of the fanfare command, and performs the production of each round (production during the round) based on the reception of the command for opening the big prize opening. Execution is performed in order, and effects between the rounds (interval effects) are sequentially performed based on the reception of the command after the special winning opening is opened. And the ending effect which alert | reports the end of jackpot based on reception of an ending command is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 138, the re-lottery effect is executed in the ending effect. Specifically, re-variation is started in a state in which the left, middle and right decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbol, and then an effect is performed in which a probable variation symbol (“777” in the example of FIG. 138) is derived and displayed. ing. Then, the player is informed that the state will enter (change) into the probability variation state.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the final stop symbol (medium symbol) is determined in the reach-less-losing determination process (normal production mode process) and the reach-less-losing variation stop symbol determining process (process in the chance mode). ) Is determined whether or not symbols (left and right symbols) other than the final stop symbol correspond to the chance-forbidden pattern. If it matches a chance-forbidden pattern, select the medium symbol addition value determination table for the chance-forbidden pattern according to the left and right patterns, and finally stop using the medium symbol addition value determination table for the selected chance-forbidden pattern An addition value for a symbol other than symbols (right symbol in the embodiment) is determined to determine the middle symbol. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent the chance eye from being derived and displayed as a missed symbol when it is determined that the combination of the left, middle, and right symbols does not become a chance. Therefore, it is possible to avoid misleading the player that the chance is displayed.

  If the design control microcomputer 100 misses a symbol information designation command even though it has received a variation pattern command for both a normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot, it is temporarily displayed as a stop symbol for a decorative symbol to be displayed in a stopped state. A non-probable variable design was determined, and the determined decorative design was derived and displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to recognize whether or not a big hit game is generated even if the production control microcomputer 100 misses the design information designation command, and the production control command related to the design of the decorative design. By reducing the number of commands, the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the re-lottery effect should be executed based on the content of the fanfare command when the stop symbol of the decoration symbol is determined and displayed, and executes the re-lottery effect. When it is determined that it should be, the probability variation design to be derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect is determined, the timing for executing the re-lottery effect is determined, and the re-lottery effect is executed at the determined execution timing. Is configured to be derived and displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to match the control state inside the gaming machine and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol displayed on the variable display device 9.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits an ending command indicating whether or not to shift to the probable change state after completion of the big hit game and whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect (steps S451 to S452), and the effect control microcomputer. When the computer 100 specifies execution of the re-lottery effect based on the content of the ending command from the game control microcomputer 560 (Y in step S955), the re-lottery effect is executed after the end of the big hit game (step S956). , S972). According to such a configuration, since the lottery effect may be executed until the next symbol variable display starts even after the end of the big hit game, the expectation for the transition to the probability change state is further increased. Can last for a period of time.

  Further, when the effect control microcomputer 100 specifies that the promotion effect is not executed based on the content of the ending command (N in step S955), the ending effect that does not execute the promotion effect after the end of the big hit game is executed. (Steps S957 and S972). According to such a configuration, it is understood that the promotion effect is not performed even after the end of the big hit game, and the player can easily grasp the game state after the end of the big hit game.

  In the above embodiment, when the re-lottery effect is executed after the big hit game is started, the non-probable variable symbol is always promoted to the probable variable symbol. However, the non-probable variable symbol is not promoted to the probable variable symbol. A re-lottery effect may be executed. In this case, the same effect (revariation of non-probabilistic variation symbol) as the case of promotion to probability variation symbol is executed until the middle of the re-lottery production, and then the probability variation big hit instead of the notification of probability variation big hit (stop display of probability variation symbol) A notification to the effect that it will not become (stop display of a non-probable variation symbol) will be performed. In addition, the execution time of the re-lottery effect that is not promoted to the probability variable symbol is set to be the same as the execution time (for example, 10 seconds) of the re-lottery effect that is promoted to the probability variable symbol.

  In addition, when transitioning to the probable state, the execution time of the ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is made shorter than the execution time of the ending effect that executes the re-lottery effect. When there is no need to notify the user, it can be avoided that the production is unnecessarily performed for a long time.

  Further, on the condition that the game control microcomputer 560 is determined to be a big hit, a fanfare command indicating whether or not to shift to the probable change state is transmitted (steps S366 and S367) for effect control. When the microcomputer 100 has not received the symbol information designation command (Y in step S635), a fanfare command (fanfare 2 indicating that the non-probable variation symbol has been provisionally determined and has been determined to shift to the probability variation state). (4 designation command) is received (Y in step S636), the promotion effect for informing that the state is shifted to the probability change state is executed at a predetermined timing (step S947 based on the re-lottery execution flag set in step S642). Alternatively, it is determined in step S955 that the re-lottery effect needs to be executed. , Which is configured to perform the steps S948, S923 or steps S956, S972), it is possible to take the matching of the display results to be displayed on the gaming machine interior control state and variable display device 9.

  In addition, when the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the promotion effect from the start to the end of the jackpot game, the promotion effect is displayed from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the variable display of the symbol. It is prohibited to execute (when the re-lottery effect is performed during the big hit round, it is determined that it is not necessary to execute the re-lottery effect in the ending in step S955 by setting the re-lottery execution completed flag in step S949. Therefore, it is possible to prevent useless control of executing the promotion effect again after executing the promotion effect.

  In addition, when the production control microcomputer 100 specifies that it will develop into super reach based on the variation pattern command, after the reach symbol is derived and displayed, the third stop symbol that constitutes the jackpot symbol in combination with the reach symbol Because the reach production that develops into super reach after passing the stop position (composition position of the big hit symbol) is executed, the expectation of the big hit is expected when the third stop symbol constituting the big hit symbol passes the constituent position of the big hit symbol In addition to being able to hold the game, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for developing into a super-reach after the off symbol is stopped and displayed, and to improve the fun of the game.

  Further, when the normal reach is developed to the super reach, the third stop symbol is temporarily stopped after the normal reach is changed for a predetermined period, and thereafter, the third stop symbol is changed again to develop the super reach. In such a configuration, there are a case where the stop symbol after the end of fluctuation of normal reach re-varies and develops to super reach, and a case where the stop symbol after the end of fluctuation of normal reach is determined without re-variation as it is. The player can be interested in whether or not to change again when the symbol is stopped at the end of the change of the game, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Also, in the case of developing from super reach to relief production, the third stop symbol is temporarily stopped after a change in super reach for a predetermined period, and then the relief production is executed to develop a big hit. Yes. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the relief effect is executed when the symbol is stopped at the end of the super reach change, and the fun of the game can be further enhanced. .

  In the above-described embodiment, the third stop symbol constituting the big hit symbol temporarily stops after one frame has passed the stop position (the next symbol of the reach symbol temporarily stops at the stop position), After that, it is configured to re-variate and develop into super reach, but it may be configured to temporarily stop after two frames or more. Further, the position for temporary stop (design difference with respect to the reach design) when the super-reach is developed may be determined based on a random number. In this case, a configuration in which the presentation control microcomputer 100 determines a position to be temporarily stopped, or a configuration in which the game control microcomputer 560 determines a position to be temporarily stopped and is designated by a variation pattern command.

  In the present invention, after the reach identification information is derived and displayed, the final stop identification information that constitutes the specific display result in combination with the reach identification information is developed into a special reach after passing the configuration position of the specific display result. When, for example, “seven” is derived and displayed as the reach symbol (first stop symbol, second stop symbol), the final stop symbol (third stop symbol) “seven” is the stop position (“7” in this position) If the vehicle stops temporarily after passing the position that will be a big hit when it stops, and then changes again and develops into super reach, the final stop symbol “7” temporarily stops before the stop position and then changes again. The case of developing to super reach after passing the stop position includes the case where the final stop symbol “seven” is developed to super reach without temporarily stopping after passing the stop position.

  In addition, in the case of “passing”, the position of the final stop symbol that is the same as the reach symbol is stopped when the decorative symbol moves vertically or horizontally on the display screen of the variable display device 9 (when scrolling vertically or horizontally). When moving across the position (position that will be a big hit when "seven" stops at this position), or when the decorative design is switched at the same position on the display screen of the variable display device 9 (the design may rotate and switch In the case where the symbols are replaced one after another), the final stop symbol is once switched to the same symbol as the reach symbol and then switched to another symbol.

  In the above embodiment, the execution timing of the re-lottery effect is set to be during the big hit game (during the round) or during the ending effect after the big hit game ends. Any timing may be used as long as it is between the end and the start of a new change. For example, the fanfare effect may be in progress or the interval display may be in progress. And it may be comprised so that the execution timing of such a re-lottery effect may be designated with a symbol information designation command. In this case, the execution time of the fanfare effect, the display time of the interval display, and the like may be varied depending on the presence / absence of the redrawing effect. Further, the number of re-drawing effects after the start of the big hit game may be once or three times or more.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the case where the symbol information designation command is missed, the non-probable variation symbol is determined and displayed, and whether or not the re-lottery effect is executed according to the content of the fanfare command received thereafter, and Although the execution timing has been confirmed (steps S635 and S636), when the ending command is received, it may be configured to confirm whether or not the re-lottery effect is performed according to the content of the ending command. Even with such a configuration, the control state inside the gaming machine and the display result displayed on the variable display device 9 can be matched. In this case, the processing in steps S635 to 637 in FIG. 40 may be executed when an ending command is received. In addition, when it is necessary to execute the re-lottery effect when the ending command is received, the re-lottery effect must be executed during the ending effect, so the process of determining the execution timing of the re-lottery effect (steps S638 to S638). S642) is not necessary.

  In the above embodiment, the symbol information designation command is used to specify whether or not the re-lottery effect is executed and the execution timing. However, the symbol information designation command is used to specify whether or not the re-lottery effect is executed. You may comprise so that it may not. With such a configuration, the types of symbol information designation commands can be reduced, and the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced. In the case of such a configuration, the production control microcomputer 100 uniquely determines whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect and the execution timing. Specifically, when the probability variation jackpot is specified by the symbol information specifying command, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect and the execution timing using a predetermined random number, and determines the result. Based on this, a re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing.

  The design information designation command specifies whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect and the execution timing, and the effect control microcomputer 100 is configured to uniquely determine whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect and the execution timing. Also good. In such a configuration, it is specified that the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending by the symbol information specifying command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 decides uniquely that the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, and conversely The symbol information designation command specifies that the re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big hit, and the effect control microcomputer 100 may uniquely determine that the re-lottery effect is to be executed during the ending. In this case, if the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending and the re-lottery effect is executed even in the ending even though the re-lottery effect is executed and promoted to the probability variation symbol, the re-lottery effect execution timing cannot be matched. Therefore, when the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, processing for prohibiting the execution of the re-lottery effect during the ending is executed. Specifically, when the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, a flag indicating that is set, and based on the fact that the flag is set, it is decided to execute the re-lottery effect during the ending. Even if it is, it controls so that a re-lottery effect is not performed.

  In the above embodiment, when the re-lottery effect is executed after the big hit, it is configured to be always promoted from the non-probable variable symbol to the probable variable symbol. May be executed. For example, even when a normal jackpot is designated by the symbol information designation command, the production control microcomputer 100 may be configured to use a predetermined random number to independently execute the re-lottery production. .

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 designates only the promotion timing (fluctuating, big hit, or ending) with the variation pattern command or the symbol information designation command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 is always re-started at the timing designated by the command. The execution control microcomputer 100 redraws the lottery effect (with promotion) with respect to the execution timing of the other re-lottery effect before promotion and the execution timing of the re-lottery effect when not promoted (usually in the case of big hit). It may be determined by lottery whether or not to produce (no promotion).

  In the above embodiment, when the production control microcomputer 100 is in the chance mode, the pre-variation symbol determination process (steps S1013, S1065, S1108, S1118) and the variation stop symbol determination process (steps S1014, S1066, In S1109 and S1119), it is determined whether or not chance eyes (including losing eyes) are to be displayed (see Steps S1022, S1032, S1076, and S1207). To display. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the game control microcomputer 560 designates the chance eyes to be displayed with the variation pattern command, and causes the effect control microcomputer 100 to display the chance eyes. May be.

  Specifically, the variation pattern commands shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 are divided into a variation pattern command that does not specify the display of the chance eye and a variation pattern command that specifies the display of the chance eye. Then, when the production mode is the chance mode, the game control microcomputer 560 selects a predetermined command from the variation pattern command that designates the display of the chance eye and the variation pattern command that does not designate the display of the chance eye, When the production mode is not the chance mode, a predetermined command is selected from the variation pattern commands that do not designate the display of the chance. When the chance display is designated by the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560, the performance control microcomputer 100 executes a process of selecting and displaying a predetermined chance. For example, when the chance pattern display is designated by the variation pattern command, the chance pattern (pre-change pattern) is selected, and after the selected chance pattern is displayed, normal variation is performed for a predetermined period, and the first stop pattern is displayed. Then, the second stop symbol is stopped in order to develop normal reach, and then the temporary stop symbol (third stop symbol) is temporarily stopped, and then the temporary stop symbol is re-varied to develop into super reach. In addition, when the chance pattern display is specified by the variation pattern command, after the normal variation is performed for a predetermined period, the chance item (the variation output item) is temporarily stopped, and then the normal variation is performed and the first stop is performed. The symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped in order to develop normal reach, and then the temporary stop symbol (third stop symbol) is temporarily stopped, and then the temporary stop symbol is re-varied to develop into super reach.

  In addition, when the chance pattern display is specified by the variation pattern command, the chance index type (chance index A or B) may not be specified, or the chance index type may be specified. If the chance eye type is not designated, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye type based on the chance eye display being designated by the variation pattern command, and the chance type of the decided chance. Choose the eye. On the other hand, when designating the type of chance eye, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the type of chance eye designated by the variation pattern command.

  Further, as a variation pattern command that is divided into a command that designates the display of the chance and a command that does not designate the display of the chance, all the variation pattern commands including the variation pattern of the normal variation may be used, or reach (normal reach, super reach). All variation pattern commands with A, Super Reach B, Super Reach C) may be used, or variation pattern commands at the time of big hits (variation pattern commands dedicated to probable big hits, normal fluctuation pattern commands dedicated to big hits, probable big hit / normal It is also possible to use a variation pattern command for jackpot. In addition, only a part of the variation pattern commands may be used as the variation pattern commands that are divided into the command that designates the display of the chance eye and the command that does not designate the display of the chance eye. For example, only the variation pattern command dedicated to probability variation jackpots, only the variation pattern command dedicated to regular jackpots, or only the variation pattern command for both probability variation jackpots / normal jackpots may be used.

  In the above embodiment, the chance eye is stopped and displayed as the symbol before the change start and the symbol during the change only during the chance mode, but even in the normal production mode instead of the chance mode, The chance eye may be stopped and displayed as the symbol before the change start and the symbol during the change. In this case, it is determined whether or not the chance control microcomputer 100 displays the chance eye even when it is not in the chance mode, and when it is determined that the chance eye is displayed, a predetermined chance eye is selected and displayed. . Further, when the game control microcomputer 560 designates the chance display by the variation pattern command, it selects the variation pattern command that designates the chance display even when the game control microcomputer 560 is not in the chance mode. Will be sent.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the first embodiment, in the reach no-miss determination process, it is determined whether the left and right symbols correspond to the chance prohibition pattern, and if so, the middle symbol addition value determination table for the chance prohibition pattern is used. The middle symbol addition value was determined to determine the middle symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the middle symbol is determined without determining whether the left and right symbols correspond to the chance-forbidden pattern, and the combination of the determined missing symbols corresponds to the chance symbol. May be configured to be changed.

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart illustrating an example of reachless loss determination processing according to the second embodiment. In the reach-less losing determination process in the second embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the current production mode is the chance mode (step S1301).

  When the effect mode is not the chance mode but the normal effect mode (N in Step S1301), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a left symbol determining random number (Step S1302). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the left symbol of the off symbol using the left symbol selection table shown in FIG. 140 according to the extracted random number value (step S1303). In the left symbol selection table, as shown in FIG. 140, a plurality of determination values are assigned to each left symbol substantially equally.

  In this embodiment, the random number for determining the left symbol (left symbol determining random number) extracted in step S1302 of the reach-less losing determination process is referred to as a first symbol random number (first identification information random number). As shown in FIG. 140, the first design random number is “/ 107”, that is, a random number having a random value of 0 to 106.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a right symbol determining random number (step S1304). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the right symbol of the off symbol using the right symbol addition value determination table shown in FIG. 140 according to the extracted random number value (step S1305). Note that a plurality of right symbol addition value determination tables may be prepared according to the contents of the variation pattern when there is no reach (see FIGS. 43 and 49 to 51).

  In this embodiment, the random number for determining the addition value for the left symbol extracted in step S1304 of the reach-less losing determination process (the right symbol determining random number) is referred to as the second symbol random number (second identification information random number). As shown in FIG. 140, the second symbol random number is “/ 73”, that is, the random number value is 0 to 72, and is different from the first symbol random number “/ 107”.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1306). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the intermediate symbol by determining the intermediate symbol addition value of the off symbol using the intermediate symbol addition value determination table shown in FIG. 140 (step S1307). A plurality of medium symbol addition value determination tables may be prepared according to the right symbol addition value (see FIGS. 44 to 46).

  In this embodiment, the random number (medium symbol determining random number) for determining the added value for the right symbol extracted in step S1306 of the reach-less losing determination process is referred to as a third symbol random number (third identification information random number). As shown in FIG. 140, the third symbol random number is “/ 163”, that is, the number of random numbers is 0 to 162, the first symbol random number “/ 107” and the second symbol random number “/ 73”. It is a random number different from (second identification information random number).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether the left middle right symbol determined in steps S1303, S1305, and S1307 corresponds to the chance eye (step S1308). If the left middle right symbol corresponds to the chance eye (Y in step S1308), the effect control microcomputer 100 adds +1 to the right symbol, changes it, and stores it (step S1309). For example, if the first left-right symbol determined first is the chance eye “Spring 7 Winter”, the right symbol “winter” is incremented by +1 to change to the symbol “one”, and the symbol “ "Spring 71". Even with such a configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent a chance eye from being derived and displayed as a missed symbol. Therefore, it is possible to avoid misleading the player that the chance is displayed.

  In addition, about the symbol determination process before a change start (step S1310) shown in FIG. 139 and the fluctuation stop symbol determination process (step S1311) without reach loss, the symbol determination process before a change start (step S1013) and reach which were demonstrated in FIG. Since it is the same process as the no-change fluctuation stop symbol determination process (step S1014), the description is omitted.

  Note that the processing in steps S1308 and S1309 in FIG. 139 may be executed in the reach-no-losing variation stop symbol determination processing (step S1311). That is, in the non-reach fluctuation change symbol determination process, the processes of steps S1302 to S1309 of FIG. 139 may be executed instead of the processes of steps S1034 to S1044 of FIG.

  In step S1309, when the chance hits, the right symbol is incremented by +1. However, the left symbol or middle symbol may be incremented by +1. Moreover, even if a predetermined symbol is added by +1, there is a possibility that it will fall under the chance again. In this case, it is determined again whether it falls under the chance, and if it falls, the predetermined symbol is incremented by one. It is preferable to do so. Further, if it is determined in step S1308 that the chance is met, it may be determined by lottery using a random number as to which of the left, middle, and right symbols is added by +1. In addition, the number of addition values may be determined by lottery using random numbers. According to such a configuration, the randomness of the off symbol can be improved.

Embodiment 3 FIG.
FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol arrangement of decorative symbols in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, as the decorative symbols displayed in the three display areas of the variable display device 9, as shown in FIG. 141, the symbols “1” to “8” and the blank between the symbols. The symbol “*” indicating the symbol is used. During variable display (fluctuation) of decorative symbols, as a rule, the left display area displays "8", "*", "7" ... "*" decorative symbols in numerical order, and the middle and right display areas , “1”, “*”, “2”... “*” Are displayed in numerical order. Note that the decorative symbol displayed in the left display area is called “left symbol”, the decorative symbol displayed in the middle display region is called “middle symbol”, and the decorative symbol displayed in the right display region is “ It is called “Right design”.

  FIG. 142 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement pattern of reach symbols in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 142, the variable display device 9 is divided into left, middle, and right display areas. In the display area of each column, three consecutive frames of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Therefore, the decorative display of 3 rows × 3 columns (= 9 symbols) is stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9 and is visually recognized by the player.

  In the variable display device 9, the left, middle and right decorative symbols are variably displayed, and the combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols (except for the symbol “*”) derived and displayed thereafter is displayed on the active line. When you have the same design, you win a big hit. In the third embodiment, five lines of “upper stage”, “middle stage”, “lower stage”, “lower right” and “upward right” are provided as effective lines.

  In the third embodiment, reach is established when the left symbol and the right symbol (except for the symbol “*”) are aligned on the same effective line. For example, as shown in FIG. 142, when the left symbol and the right symbol are aligned with the same symbol “1” in the upper line (“1 UH”), the left symbol and the right symbol are the same symbol “1” in the lower line. When aligned (“1LH”), when the left symbol and right symbol are aligned with the same symbol “1” in the middle line (“1CH”), when the left symbol and right symbol are double lines (lower right and up right) When the same symbols “1” and “8” are arranged (“1WH”), reach is established.

  The symbols (1UH, 1LH, etc.) attached to each reach symbol indicate the symbol number (“1”, “2”, “3”...), And the second digit indicates a line (“ “Upper stage”, “middle stage”, “lower stage”, “double line”), and the first digit “H” indicates a state of “Hazure”. In the second-digit line display, “U” is an abbreviation for “upper” Upper, “C” is an abbreviation for “middle” Center, “L” is an abbreviation for “lower” Lower, “W” indicates “double line”. For example, “7CH” means that the symbol is “7”, “middle line”, and “out”.

  FIG. 143 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement pattern of jackpot symbols in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 143, a big hit is obtained when the combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols (excluding the symbol “*”) is aligned with the same symbol on the active line. For example, as shown in FIG. 143, when the left middle right decorative symbol combination is aligned with the same symbol “1” in the upper line (“1UF”), the left middle right decorative symbol combination is in the lower line. When the same symbol “1” is aligned (“1LF”), the combination of the left middle right decorative symbol is aligned with the same symbol “1” in the middle line (“1CF”), the left middle right decorative symbol When the combination is aligned with the same symbol “1” in the line with the lower right (“1SF”), when the combination of the left and right decorative symbols is aligned with the same symbol “1” with the line with the upper right (“1AF”) ), A big hit.

  The symbol (1UF, 1LF, etc.) attached to each jackpot symbol is the symbol number (“1” “2” “3”...) In the third digit, and the second digit is displayed in a line (“ “Upper stage”, “middle stage”, “lower stage”, “lower right”, “upward right”), and the first digit “F” indicates a “big hit” (Fever) state. In the second-digit line display, “U” is an abbreviation for “upper” Upper, “C” is an abbreviation for “middle” Center, “L” is an abbreviation for “lower” Lower, “S” is an acronym for “downward right” SAGARI, and “A” is an acronym for “upward right” AGARI. For example, “7AF” means that the symbol is “7”, “rising line to the right”, and “big hit”.

  In the third embodiment, among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. 143, the combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is a specific symbol (“1” “3” “5” “7” “8”) on the active line. The symbols in the same state are the probability variation symbols. Specifically, in FIG. 143, “1UF” “1LF” “1CF” “1SF” “1AF”, “3UF” “3LF” “3CF” “3SF” “3AF”, “5UF” “5LF” “5CF” The symbols “5SF”, “5AF”, “7UF”, “7LF”, “7CF”, “7SF”, “7AF”, “8UF”, “8LF”, “8CF”, “8SF” and “8AF” are probabilistic symbols. In addition, among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. 143, the symbols in the state in which the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned with the symbols other than the specific symbols (“2”, “4”, “6”) on the active line are not displayed. It is a probable variation. Specifically, in FIG. 143, “2UF” “2LF” “2CF” “2SF” “2AF”, “4UF” “4LF” “4CF” “4SF” “4AF”, “6UF” “6LF” “6CF” The symbols “6SF” and “6AF” are non-probable variations.

  FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram showing a chance eye A on performance in the third embodiment. FIG. 145 is an explanatory diagram showing a chance eye B in performance in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 144, as the chance item A, 40 types of chance items (“1C” to 40C ”) are provided. In addition, as shown in FIG. 145, as the chance item B, 32 types of chance items (“41C” to “72C”) are provided. The symbol (C) attached to each chance is an abbreviation of “Chance”.

  FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram showing a chance eye (sudden probability variation symbol) for sudden probability variation big hit in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146, 10 kinds of symbols (designs surrounded by a thick frame: “73C”, “78C”, “113C”, “118C”, “123C”, “128C”) “133C”, “138C”, “143C”, “148C”). Specifically, “135” “571” “185” “318” “387” “578” “753” “783” “835” “873” is stopped and displayed suddenly on the middle line. It is a probable variation. In addition, the suddenly probable pattern is also called a chance chance for sudden use.

  The sudden probability variation symbol is a kind of jackpot symbol, but it is desirable not to easily recognize the occurrence of the jackpot by the sudden probability variation symbol in order to make it appear that it has suddenly shifted to the probability variation state. For this reason, as described above, the suddenly probable symbols are different from the jackpot symbols. In the above-described first embodiment, when it is determined that a sudden probability variation is a big hit (Y in step S662 in FIG. 41), only one type of sudden probability variation symbol (“summer / winter spring”) is provided. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146, since 10 types of symbols are provided as suddenly probable changes, the suddenly probable symbols are determined automatically (step S664 in FIG. 41). Instead of the process of step S664, it is necessary to perform a process of selecting and determining a suddenly probable symbol from 10 types of symbols. More specifically, determination values are assigned to 10 types of symbols, and a process having a determination value that coincides with a random number value for determining a suddenly probable variable symbol is performed as a suddenly probabilistic symbol.

  FIG. 146 also shows symbols other than the sudden probability variation symbols (such as “74C” to “77C”; hereinafter referred to as “accuracy similar symbols”). These suddenly similar symbols have the same sequence (combination) of the sudden probability variation symbols and numbers, but are stopped and displayed on a line different from the line where the sudden probability variation symbols are stopped. That is, in the example of “135”, the suddenly probable symbols are stopped and displayed on the middle line, while the suddenly similar symbols are stopped and displayed on the upper and lower lines. Since such a symbol suddenly resembles a probable variation symbol, if it is derived and displayed as an outlier symbol, the player may misunderstand that the sudden probability variation symbol has been derived and displayed. For this reason, as in the case of the sudden probability variation symbol, a control is executed to prohibit the derivation and display of the sudden similarity symbol as a symbol.

  FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram showing a chance hit for small hits (small hit symbol) in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 147, 10 types of symbols (designs surrounded by a thick frame: “83C”, “88C”, “153C”, “158C”, “163C”, “168C”) "173C", "178C", "183C", "188C"). Specifically, the symbols in the state where “531”, “175”, “317”, “357”, “378”, “518”, “713”, “815”, “853” and “875” are stopped and displayed on the middle line are small. It is a winning symbol. A small hit symbol is also called a chance for a small hit. In the first embodiment, when it is determined that a small hit is made (N in step S662 in FIG. 41), only one type of small hit symbol (“summer / winter spring”) is provided. Although the small hit symbol is automatically determined (step S666 in FIG. 41), in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 147, ten types of symbols are provided as the small hit symbol. Instead of the process of step S666, it is necessary to perform a process of selecting and determining a small hit symbol from 10 types of symbols. Specifically, determination values are assigned to 10 types of symbols, and a process of setting a symbol with a determination value that matches a random number value for determining a small hit symbol as a small hit symbol is performed.

  FIG. 147 also shows symbols other than the small hit symbol (such as “84C” to “87C”; hereinafter referred to as “small hit similar symbol”). These small hit similar symbols have the same arrangement (combination) of the small hit symbols and numbers, but are stopped and displayed on a line different from the line on which the small hit symbols are stopped. That is, in the example of “531”, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line, but the small hit similar symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper and lower lines. Since such a symbol is similar to the small hit symbol, if it is derived and displayed as an outlier symbol, the player may misunderstand that the sudden probability variation symbol similar to the small hit symbol is derived and displayed. For this reason, as in the case of the small hit symbol, control for prohibiting derivation and display of the small hit similar symbol as a symbol is executed.

  FIG. 148 is a flowchart illustrating an example of reachless losing determination processing according to the third embodiment. In the reachless losing determination process in the third embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the current effect mode is the chance mode (step S1401).

  When the effect mode is not the chance mode but the normal effect mode (N in step S1401), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a left symbol determining random number (step S1402). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the left symbol of the off symbol using the left symbol selection table shown in FIG. 149 in accordance with the extracted random value (step S1403).

  In this embodiment, the random number for determining the left symbol (left symbol determining random number) extracted in step S1402 of the reach-less losing determination process is referred to as a first symbol random number (first identification information random number). The first design random number is “max 67”, that is, a random number having a random value of 0 to 66.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts the right symbol determining random number (step S1404). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the right symbol addition value determination table (T-2) corresponding to the left symbol shown in FIG. 150 (step S1405). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the right symbol of the off symbol using the right symbol addition value determination table (T-2) according to the left symbol in accordance with the random number value extracted in step S1404 (step S1404). S1406).

  As shown in FIG. 150, the right symbol addition value determination table is a table when the left symbol determined in step S1403 (the middle symbol in the left display area) is a numeric symbol (“1” “5”). And the table when the left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display area) is a numeric symbol (“2” “6”), and the left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display region) is a numeric symbol ( "3" and "7"), the table when the left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display area) is a numeric symbol ("4" and "8"), and the left symbol (left The table when the symbol in the middle of the display area is a blank symbol (“*” between “1” and “2”), and the symbol when the left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display area) is blank ( The table when “*” between “2” and “3” and the left symbol (left display area) The table when the middle symbol) is a blank symbol (“*” between “3” and “4”), and the left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display area) is a blank symbol (“4”). And “*” between “5” and “5” and the left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display area) is a blank symbol (“*” between “5” and “6”) A table at a certain time, a table when the left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display area) is a blank symbol ("*" between "6" and "7"), and the left symbol (left display) The table when the symbol in the middle of the area is a blank symbol (“*” between “7” and “8”) and the symbol when the left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display area) is blank (“ A table for “*” between 8 ”and“ 1 ”is prepared. In FIG. 150, only the table when the left symbol is a blank symbol “*” between “1” and “2” is shown as the table when the left symbol is a blank symbol. The right symbol addition value determination table (T-2) shown in FIG. 150 is obtained by adding the middle symbol of the right display area (addition of the middle symbol of the right display area to the middle symbol of the left display area in the variable display device 9. Is a table for determining (value).

  In the right symbol addition value determination table, in the table when the left symbol is a numerical symbol (“1” “5”), for example, in order to prevent single reach from occurring, the addition value “ The number of determination values assigned to “2” is “0”. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 141, when the determined left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display area) is “5” (symbol number 7), the symbol number of the right symbol of “5” is Therefore, when the addition value “2” for the left symbol is determined, reach will occur, and in order to avoid this, a decision value should not be assigned to the addition value “2” for the left symbol. ing. Table when the left symbol is a number symbol (“2” “6”), table when the left symbol is a symbol symbol (“3” “7”), and the left symbol is a symbol symbol (“4”) The same applies to the table when “8”).

  Also, in the table when the left symbol is a blank symbol (the table when the left symbol shown in FIG. 150 is “*” between “1” and “2”), single reach and double reach do not occur. Therefore, the number of determination values assigned to the added values “2”, “4”, and “6” for the determined left symbol is “0”. For example, as shown in FIG. 150, when the left symbol is “*” (“*” between “1” and “2”), the upper symbol of the left display area is “1” and the lower symbol. Is “2”. In this case, in order to prevent the occurrence of double reach, the determination value assigned to the added value “4” for the left symbol in which the upper symbol in the right display area is “2” and the lower symbol is “1”. The number is “0”. In addition, in order to prevent single reach from occurring, an added value “2” is added to the left symbol that is the upper symbol “1” in the right display region, and the lower symbol that is “2” is the lower symbol in the right display region. The number of determination values assigned to the added value “6” for the symbol is “0”.

  The production control microcomputer 100 extracts a random number value in step S1404, selects a right symbol addition value determination table corresponding to the left symbol determined in step S1403, and adds corresponding to the determination value that matches the extracted random value. The value is determined, and the symbol obtained by adding the added value to the left symbol is determined as the right symbol (the middle symbol in the right display area).

  In this embodiment, the random number (the right symbol determining random number) for determining the added value for the left symbol extracted in step S1404 of the reach-less losing determination process is referred to as the second symbol random number (second identification information random number). As shown in FIG. 150, the second symbol random number is “max99”, that is, the random number value is 0 to 98, and is different from the first symbol random number of “max67”.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1407). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the middle symbol addition value determination table (T-3) shown in FIG. 154 by using the chance prohibition table (T-4) shown in FIG. 153 (step S1408). . Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol of the off symbol using the middle symbol addition value determination table (T-3) selected in step S1408 according to the extracted random number value (step S1409). Note that the middle symbol addition value determination table (T-3) shown in FIG. 154 is the middle symbol of the middle display area in the variable display device 9 (the middle symbol of the middle display area relative to the middle symbol of the right display area). Is an addition value).

  Here, as described above, in order to avoid the misunderstanding that the chance eye is derived and displayed when the outlier symbol is derived and displayed, in this embodiment, the chance eye (chance eye A, chance eye B, The control is executed to prohibit the derivation and display of the same symbol as the chance symbol for sudden chance (sudden probability variation symbol) and the chance symbol for small hit (small hit symbol) as a symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, a symbol (probable similarity symbol, small hit similarity symbol) similar to the chance item (probability chance factor (sudden probability variation symbol), small chance item (small hit symbol)) is used. Control is also performed that prohibits derivation and display as out-of-order symbols.

  151 and 152 show arrangement patterns (chance eye prohibition patterns) of the left symbol and the right symbol in which chance eyes (including a sudden similarity symbol and a small hit similarity symbol) may occur. When the determined left symbol and right symbol correspond to the chance eye prohibition patterns shown in FIGS. 151 and 152, chance eyes (including a sudden similarity symbol and a small hit similarity symbol) may occur. Accordingly, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the chance eye prohibition table to check whether the determined combination of the left symbol and the right symbol corresponds to the chance eye prohibition pattern. As shown in FIG. 153, the chance eye prohibition table is assigned numbers of the chance eye prohibition patterns (“LR1” to “LR80”) to the left symbol and right symbol matrixes. For example, when the left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display area) is “8” and the right symbol (the middle symbol in the right display area) is “2”, the chance eye prohibition pattern “LR40” (FIG. 144). Corresponds to the forbidden pattern of the chance eye 40C shown in FIG. “LR0” indicates that it does not fall under the chance eye prohibition pattern. For example, when the left symbol is “8” and the right symbol is “1”, it does not correspond to the chance-forbidden pattern shown in FIGS. 151 and 152, so “LR0” is assigned.

  In this way, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms which one of the chance eye prohibition patterns (LR1 to LR80) corresponds to using the chance eye prohibition table, or does not correspond to the chance eye prohibition pattern. (LR0) is confirmed. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the medium symbol addition value determination table (FIG. 154) corresponding to LR0 to LR80. For example, when the combination of the left symbol and the right symbol corresponds to the chance prohibition pattern “LR1”, it is determined to use the middle symbol addition value determination table associated with “LR1” illustrated in FIG. Although not shown in FIG. 154, tables associated with “LR2” to “LR80” are also provided as medium symbol addition value determination tables.

  In the intermediate symbol addition value determination table associated with “LR1” to “LR80”, the determination value is not assigned to the addition value of the middle symbol for the right symbol that establishes the chance eye (that is, the determination value to be allocated). The number is 0). For example, in the middle symbol addition value determination table associated with “LR1”, the right symbol (the middle symbol in the right display area) in the chance eye 1C shown in FIG. 144 is “1”, and the middle symbol (inside Since the middle symbol of the display area is “*” (note that the upper symbol “1” of the middle display area), the middle symbol addition value “15” for the right symbol that establishes the chance 1C is determined. A value has not been allocated. Further, since the right symbol (the middle symbol in the right display area) in the chance eye 41C shown in FIG. 145 is “1” and the middle symbol (the middle symbol in the middle display area) is “1”, the chance No determination value is assigned to the addition value “0” of the middle symbol for the right symbol that establishes the eye 41C.

  On the other hand, in the middle symbol addition value determination table associated with “LR0”, no chance is established no matter what symbol the middle symbol becomes, so the determination values are assigned to all symbols almost equally. It is.

  The production control microcomputer 100 selects the middle symbol addition value determination table in step S1408, determines an addition value corresponding to the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1407, and adds the addition value to the right symbol. The symbol is determined to be a middle symbol (middle symbol in the middle display area) (step S1409). Thus, in the reach-less losing determination process, it is prohibited to determine the out-of-order symbol (including the sudden similarity symbol and the small hit similarity symbol) as the decorative symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the random number (medium symbol determining random number) for determining the addition value for the right symbol extracted in step S1407 of the reach-less losing determination process is referred to as a third symbol random number (third identification information random number). As shown in FIG. 154, the third design random number is “max97”, that is, the number of random numbers is 0 to 96, and the first design random number of “max67” or the second design random number of “max99” (second It is a random number different from (identification information random number).

  In addition, about the symbol determination process before a change start (step S1410) shown in FIG. 148, and the change stop symbol determination process at the time of no reach loss (step S1411), the symbol determination process before a change start (step S1013) demonstrated in FIG. Since it is the same process as the no-fluctuation fluctuation stop symbol determination process (step S1014), the description is omitted.

  It should be noted that, even when the variable stop symbol is determined in the no-reach fluctuation stop symbol determination process (step S1411), the above-described process can determine the non-reach symbol.

  FIG. 155 is a flowchart illustrating an example of reach loss determination processing according to the third embodiment. In the reach loss determination process in the third embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the current production mode is the chance mode (step S1421).

  When the effect mode is not the chance mode but the normal effect mode (N in Step S1421), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a reach type determining random number (Step S1422). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a reach type using a reach type determination table (not shown) in accordance with the extracted random number value (step S1423). The reach type is divided into single reach and double reach.

  The production control microcomputer 100 extracts a reach design determination random number (reach design random number, reach identification information random number) (step S1424), and selects a reach design according to the reach type determined in step S1423 according to the extracted random number value. Reach symbols are determined and stored using the table (step S1425). For example, if the reach type is single reach, the reach design is determined using the reach design selection table for single reach shown in FIG. If the reach type is double reach, the reach design is determined using the reach design selection table for double reach shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the reach symbol random number (reach symbol determination random number) is “max 127”, that is, a random number having a random number value of 0 to 126. As described above, the first symbol random number, the second symbol random number, the third symbol random number, and the reach symbol random number are different random numbers that are updated in different ranges.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 identifies a symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol based on the variation pattern command, and determines and stores the middle symbol based on the identified symbol difference (step S1426).

  In addition, about the symbol determination process before a change start (step S1427) and the fluctuation stop symbol determination process at the time of reach loss (step S1428) shown in FIG. Since this is the same process as the time variation stop symbol determination process, the description is omitted. It should be noted that the variable stop symbol determination process (step S1428) when the reach is lost may be the same process as steps S1422 to S1426.

  Next, a description will be given of the effect mode during the variation of the decorative pattern. In the first embodiment, the decorative symbols are changed by rotating at the same position. However, in the third embodiment, the decorative symbols are positioned vertically on the display screen of the variable display device 9. It fluctuates by moving (vertical scrolling). In the first embodiment, the symbols are stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol in the normal performance mode, and the symbols are stopped in an arbitrary order in the chance mode. In the effect mode shown below, the case where the symbols stop in the order of the left symbol (first stop symbol), the right symbol (second stop symbol), and the middle symbol (third stop symbol) is shown. Furthermore, the temporary stop symbol (third temporary stop symbol) of the third stop symbol at the time of executing the relief effect is set as the next symbol of the reach symbol (pre-relief symbol). The temporary stop symbol of the stop symbol is the symbol one frame before the reach symbol.

  FIG. 158 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode during normal fluctuation and normal reach fluctuation in a fluctuation pattern with super reach. When the variation of the decorative symbol is started, the variation speed is increased from the state where the left middle right decorative symbol is stopped, and the variation is performed for a predetermined time while the variation rate is increased. Then, the fluctuation rate becomes lower than the symbol “8” two frames before the symbol “7” which is the left symbol, the symbol “7” stops at the middle stage, and the fluctuation variation starts. Next, the fluctuation speed becomes lower from the symbol “6” two frames before the symbol “7” as the right symbol, the symbol “7” stops at the middle stage, and the fluctuation variation starts. At this time, when the left and right symbols are in the middle stage and stop at the same symbol “7”, reach is established in the middle line, and the fluctuation of the normal reach is started. When normal reach fluctuation starts, the sound effect (fluctuating sound) and the lighting mode of the lamp / LED are changed.

  And, the middle symbol is a symbol (for example, 12 frames before the temporary stop symbol; in the first embodiment, eight frames before the temporary stop symbol (“*” next to “7”)). The fluctuation speed becomes low from “*” next to “1”. During normal fluctuation and normal reach fluctuation, the background color of the background image (for example, the color of the background “sky”) is blue (daytime). Then, the middle symbol “7” passes one frame past the position of the middle effective line, and the temporary stop symbol (“*” next to “7”) temporarily stops on the middle effective line. In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the off-normal reach, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined here, and the fluctuation is finished. In the case of developing to super reach, after the shaking fluctuation is performed, the middle symbol is changed again to develop to super reach. At this time, the background color of the background image (background color of the entire screen) changes to black. Further, the sound effect (fluctuating sound) and the lighting mode of the lamp / LED are changed. In the present embodiment, reach 1-1 (super reach A), reach 1-2 (super reach A that executes a relief effect), reach 2-1 (super reach B), or reach 2- based on the variation pattern. A case of developing to any one of 2 (super reach B for executing a relief effect) will be described.

  FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect aspect during the change of super reach A (reach 1-1) in the change pattern with super reach. When the middle symbol re-varies and develops into super reach A (reach 1-1), the effect of tilting operation in super reach A is started. When the tilt operation is performed, the background color of the background image changes from black to red. In the production of the tilt movement, a girl character appears and hits the middle symbol “5” to break it. The girl character hits the next medium symbol “6” to break it. Then, the middle symbol is determined as “7”. Thereby, the big hit symbol of “777” is derived and displayed, and the big hit is determined.

  FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect aspect during the change of super reach A (reach 1-2) in the change pattern with super reach. When the middle symbol is changed again to develop a super reach A (reach 1-2) that executes a relief effect, the effect of the tilt operation in the super reach A is started. When the tilt operation is performed, the background color of the background image changes from black to red. In the production of the tilt movement, a girl character appears, hits the middle symbol “5” and breaks, and hits the next middle symbol “6”, as in FIG. However, in the case shown in FIG. 112, the middle symbol “6” is not broken and the girl character gives up. At this time, the reach of “767” is temporarily stopped. Note that, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier super reach A, the decoration symbol stop pattern is determined here, and the fluctuation is completed. When the relief effect is executed, an ojisan character appears together with the sound effect “Still More” from the speaker 27, and the relief effect is executed. When the relief effect is executed, the background color of the background image changes from red to rainbow. Further, the sound effect (fluctuating sound) and the lighting mode of the lamp / LED are changed. In the relief effect, the old character kicks and destroys the middle symbol “6”. Then, the middle symbol is determined as “7”. Thereby, the big hit symbol of “777” is derived and displayed, and the big hit is determined.

  FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect aspect during the change of super reach B (reach 2-1) in the change pattern with super reach. When the middle symbol is changed again and develops into Super Reach B (Reach 2-1), the effect of tilting operation in Super Reach B is started. When the tilt operation is performed, the background color of the background image changes from black to red. In the direction of the tilt movement, a cannon comes out and the cannon fires a ball on the middle symbol “5” and breaks it. The cannon also fires and breaks the ball on the next medium symbol “6”. Then, the middle symbol is determined as “7”. Thereby, the big hit symbol of “777” is derived and displayed, and the big hit is determined.

  FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect aspect during the change of super reach B (reach 2-2) in the change pattern with super reach. When the middle symbol re-varies and develops to super reach B (reach 2-2) that executes the relief effect, the effect of the tilt operation in the super reach B is started. When the tilt operation is performed, the background color of the background image changes from black to red. In the tilting action, as in FIG. 113, a cannon comes out, the cannon fires a ball on the middle symbol “5” and breaks it, and also fires a ball on the next middle symbol “6”. However, in the case shown in FIG. 114, the middle symbol “6” remains intact. At this time, the reach of “767” is temporarily stopped. Note that, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier super reach B, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined here, and the fluctuation is finished. When the relief effect is executed, three cannons come out together with the sound effect “still more” from the speaker 27 and the relief effect is executed. When the relief effect is executed, the background color of the background image changes from red to rainbow. Further, the sound effect (fluctuating sound) and the lighting mode of the lamp / LED are changed. In the relief effect, each of the three cannons fires a ball on the middle symbol “6” and destroys the middle symbol “6”. Then, the middle symbol is determined as “7”. Thereby, the big hit symbol of “777” is derived and displayed, and the big hit is determined.

  In addition, while the first embodiment is a one-line effect, the third embodiment is a five-line effect, but the timing is developed to normal reach or super reach in the effect modes shown in FIGS. 158 to 162. The timing of performing the relief effect, the timing of executing the relief effect, and the like are the same as the timings described in FIGS. 123 to 126 of the first embodiment.

  As described above, according to the third embodiment, even if the variable display device 9 is capable of stopping symbols on a plurality of lines, it is possible to reliably prevent a chance eye from being derived and displayed as a missed symbol. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the chance is derived and displayed.

  In addition, when determining the middle symbol, select the middle symbol addition value determination table that does not become a symbol similar to the chance according to the left or right symbol (success probability similar symbol, small hit similar symbol) using the table for chance prohibition rule Since the middle symbol is determined using the selected middle symbol addition value determination table, it is possible to reliably prevent the symbol similar to the chance symbol from being derived and displayed as an outlier symbol, It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the chance is derived and displayed.

Embodiment 4 FIG.
In the first embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, the proportion of the specific symbols included in the decorative symbols (specific symbol ratio) was 7 / 12≈58.3%. When is in the probability variation state (including the probability variation time short state), the proportion of the specific symbol in the decorative symbol may be increased. For example, in the normal game state, as described above, the probable big hit is made when seven symbols of “three”, “five”, “seven”, “spring”, “summer”, “autumn”, and “winter” are arranged. In the case of a state, a probable big hit is given when eight symbols of “one”, “three”, “five”, “seven”, “spring”, “summer”, “autumn”, and “winter” are arranged. In this case, the ratio of the specific symbol in the normal gaming state is 58.3%, but the ratio of the specific symbol in the probability variation state is 8 / 12≈66.7%. Note that the probability (proportion of probability variation jackpot) of probability variation jackpots (excluding sudden probability variation jackpots) to the probability of being a jackpot of 15 rounds is the same as in the normal gaming state.

  As described above, when “one” is included as a specific symbol causing a probable big hit, the judgment value is also distributed to the symbol “one” in the probability variation symbol selection table shown in FIG. 103 and shown in FIG. In the non-probable variation symbol selection table, the determination value is not distributed to the symbol “one”. Further, in the re-lottery selection table shown in FIGS. 105 to 110, the determination value is not distributed to the re-lottery pattern for the temporary winning symbol “one”. In addition, in the re-lot selection table of the cas system shown in FIGS. 105, 107, and 109, the final stop symbol should not be “1”, or the re-lottery pattern with the final stop symbol “1”. Do not distribute judgment values. In the probability variation system re-lottery selection table shown in FIGS. 106, 108, and 110, a re-lottery pattern in which the final stop symbol is “1” may be provided. By using such a table in the probability variation state, a symbol “one” can be included in a specific symbol. Other processes are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the ratio that the specific symbol is derived and displayed in the probability variation state and the probability variation big hit (the proportion that the probability variation state is continued) is high. Can be increased. In other words, in the normal gaming state or in the short-time state, the player is happy if the big hit (non-probable big hit) is a big hit, but in the probable state, the probabilistic state ends when the normal big hit. Therefore, the player wants not only a big hit but also a promising big hit. Therefore, when the player is in the probabilistic state, expecting a probable big hit, increasing the ratio of a specific symbol in the probable state will attract the player's interest and further enhance the interest of the game. it can.

Embodiment 5. FIG.
FIG. 163 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board, the sound / lamp control board, and the display control board in the fifth embodiment. In the board configuration shown in FIG. 7, the production control microcomputer 100 mounted on the production control board 80 controls the display state of the variable display device 9 and outputs control signals to the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70. Thus, the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps and the sound output of the speaker 27 are controlled. However, in the board configuration shown in FIG. 163, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A mounted on the sound / lamp control board 80A controls the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps and the sound output of the speaker 27, and the display control board 80B. The display control microcomputer 100 </ b> B is configured to control the display state of the variable display device 9. Then, a control command (hereinafter, sound / lamp control command) from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 is first transmitted to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A of the sound / lamp control board 80A. The sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A transmits a control command (hereinafter referred to as a display control command) corresponding to the sound / lamp control command received to the display control microcomputer 100B of the display control board 80B. The sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A controls the lighting / extinction of various lamps and the sound output of the speaker 27 based on the sound / lamp control command from the game control microcomputer 560. The display control microcomputer 100B The display state of the variable display device 9 is controlled based on a display control command from the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A.

  FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing a sound / lamp control main process executed by the sound / lamp control microcomputer according to the fifth embodiment. When the power is turned on, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A starts executing the main process. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control processing (step S711). Thereafter, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A shifts to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S712). When a timer interrupt occurs, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A clears the flag (step S713) and executes the following sound / lamp control process.

  In the sound / lamp control process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A first analyzes the received effect control command (sound / lamp side command analysis process: step S714). Next, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A performs a sound / lamp control process (step S715). In the sound / lamp control process, the process corresponding to the current control state is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and various lamps are turned on / off, the sound output of the speaker 27 is controlled, and the like. Further, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating various random numbers is executed (step S716). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S712.

  FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing a sound / lamp-side command analysis process (step S714) in the sound / lamp control main process. The sound / lamp control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is stored in the command reception buffer. In the sound / lamp side command analysis processing, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S721). If a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the reception command is read from the command reception buffer (step S722).

  If the received sound / lamp control command is a control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern (step S723), the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A uses the EXT data of the command as variation pattern data in the RAM. The data is stored in the storage area (step S724), and the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S725). Then, control for transmitting a display control command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control microcomputer 100B is executed (step S726).

  If the received sound / lamp control command is a control command (design information designation command) for designating symbol information (step S727), the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A displays a display control command corresponding to the symbol information. Control to be transmitted to the control microcomputer 100B is executed (step S728). If the received sound / lamp control command is another control command, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A performs control to transmit a display control command corresponding to the other command to the display control microcomputer 100B. Execute (step S729).

  When the display control microcomputer 100B receives the display control command from the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A, the same processing as the processing of the effect control means described in each of the above embodiments based on the received command. Execute. That is, the processing in the case where “display control” is replaced with “display control” in FIGS. 37 to 137 is executed.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, a presentation control board 80, an audio output board 70, and a lamp driver board 35 are provided as boards on which a circuit for controlling the presentation device is mounted. In the fifth embodiment, a sound / lamp is provided. Although the control board 80A and the display control board 80B are provided, a circuit for controlling the effect device may be mounted on one board. Furthermore, when the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted on two substrates, the way of dividing the circuit for controlling the effect device mounted on each substrate is arbitrary. For example, a first effect control board (display / lamp control board) on which a variable display device 9 and a circuit for controlling a lamp and the like are mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (such as the speaker 27) are mounted. Two boards, such as two production control boards, may be provided. In the fifth embodiment, the sound / lamp control board 80A transmits a display control command corresponding to the sound / lamp control command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the display control board 80B. May be the same data as the sound / lamp control command, or may be changed to a simplified command and transmitted as a display control command. In addition, when two boards, the first effect control board and the second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 is transmitted to the second effect control board, A command is transmitted as it is from the second effect control board to the first effect control board, or is transmitted after processing (for example, changing the command form or contents, simplifying, or selecting only necessary commands). You may comprise.

  The big hit symbol and the small hit symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8 may be a common symbol (for example, “7”). In this way, the player will not be aware of the big hit or the small hit, the big hit type, or the like by the symbols displayed on the special symbol display 8. Therefore, the expectation for the transition to the probability variation state in the re-lottery effect is not impaired. In addition, the expectation of whether suddenly a big hit or a small hit will not be lost.

  In addition, as a special symbol stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8, the symbol for 15 rounds (probable big hit, non-probable big hit) may be a common big hit symbol. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether the probability change big hit or the non-probability big hit is based on the symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8. In addition, as a special symbol stop symbol displayed on the special symbol indicator 8, the symbol at the time of two rounds (suddenly probable big hit, small hit) may be a common symbol. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether the probability sudden hit or the big hit is suddenly determined by the symbols displayed on the special symbol display 8.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the variation pattern command is a dedicated variation pattern command (a variation pattern command that is not a regular big hit / probable variation big hit combined variation pattern command), the decoration pattern is decorated based on the dedicated variation pattern command. It was comprised so that the stop symbol of a symbol might be determined. However, it is configured to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol by determining the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the symbol information specifying command at the normal time and referring to the contents of the variation pattern command only when the symbol information specifying command is missed. May be.

  In addition, when the variation pattern command is a dedicated variation pattern command, the decorative symbol stop symbol is determined based on the variation pattern command regardless of whether the symbol information designation command is missed or not. If the design information designation command cannot be received when any of the variation pattern command dedicated to probability variation jackpot, the variation pattern command dedicated to normal jackpot, or the variation pattern command dedicated to outliers is received, the variation pattern The decoration symbol may be determined based on the content of the command.

  Alternatively, the decorative symbol stop symbol may always be determined based only on the variation pattern command. That is, the variation pattern commands are all dedicated variation patterns, and the variation pattern command for both normal big hit / probable big hit may not be provided. Alternatively, the decorative symbol stop symbol may always be determined based only on the symbol information designation command. In other words, the variation pattern command may be determined according to the content of the symbol information designation command as to the stop symbol of the decoration symbol only by designating the variation pattern (variation time).

  In each of the above embodiments, the variation pattern command and the symbol information designation command are separated, but a single command may be used. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 may transmit one command indicating the variation pattern and the symbol information (displacement, normal big hit, or probable big hit) to the effect control microcomputer 100 at the start of symbol variation. Good. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the variation of the symbol based on the common command, specifies the variation pattern (including the variation time), and further determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

  In each of the above embodiments, the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect during symbol variation is specified by the variation pattern command (a variation pattern with a re-lottery effect during symbol variation is distinguished from a variation pattern without a re-lottery effect). At the same time, the symbol information designation command specified the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game and the execution timing of the re-lottery effect (promotion effect), but the design information designation command is not limited to this configuration. Without specifying whether or not a re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game, with the presence or absence of the re-lottery effect during the symbol variation with the change pattern command, whether or not the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game and the re-lottery effect (promotion effect) The execution timing may be designated.

  In addition, in the variation pattern command, the disparity, the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit are specified (the variation pattern is distinguished for each outlier, the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit), and the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect during the symbol variation is designated, and the symbol information is designated. In the command, a stop symbol, a non-probable variation symbol, a probability variation symbol, a sudden probability variation symbol, or a small hit symbol may be designated as a stop symbol at the time of a variable stop. When the probability variation big hit (execution of re-lottery effect during big hit) or probability variation big hit (execution of re-lottery effect during ending) is determined in step S62, the probability variable big hit is determined internally, Since the stop symbol is a non-probable variable symbol, a symbol information specifying command for specifying the non-probable variable symbol is transmitted. In the case of such a command designation method, the production control microcomputer 100 recognizes whether it is a big hit or a big hit type (ordinary big hit or a probable big hit) based on the variation pattern command, and Based on the information designation command, it is recognized whether the stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop should be an off symbol, a non-probable variable symbol, a probabilistic variable symbol, a sudden probability variable symbol, or a small hit symbol symbol. In the case of a big hit (excluding a sudden probability change big hit), the production control microcomputer 100 recognizes the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect after the big hit game starts based on the variation pattern command and the symbol information designation command. For example, if the symbol information designation command recognizes that the stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop is an uncertain variable symbol, and if the variable pattern command recognizes a probable bonus symbol, it must be promoted to a probable bonus symbol with a re-lottery effect after the jackpot game starts. Judge that there is.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the re-draw lottery effect after the big hit game, after the symbols are re-variable, the probability variation symbols are derived and displayed. You may make it alert | report to a player that it was a probable big hit by displaying a character (it transfers to a probable change state). In this case, it is determined in step S625E, S685, S637B that “probability change” is displayed instead of determining the probability change symbol.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the big hit symbol is a flat eye such as “1 · 1 · 1”, but may be a combination of symbols other than the blue eye. For example, a big hit may be made when the left, middle and right symbols on the active line are aligned with “Large, Win, Ri”. In that case, it becomes reach when a part of the big hit symbol is aligned as the left and right symbols on the effective line.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the number of fluctuations after the end of the normal jackpot is counted at the start of the fluctuation, and the time reduction flag is reset when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number. It is also possible to count the number of fluctuations after the completion and reset the time reduction flag when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the fluctuation pattern command for designating the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit for 15 rounds is a fluctuation pattern command for both normal big hit / probable big hit, a fluctuation pattern command dedicated for certain big hit, and a fluctuation only for normal big hit. The pattern command is provided, but it is possible to use only the variation pattern command for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit and the variation pattern command dedicated to the probable variation big hit (there is no normal variation pattern command dedicated to big hit).

  In each of the above embodiments, when determining the middle symbol in the reach-less losing determination process, the addition value for the right symbol is determined using the middle symbol addition value determination table in which the addition value for the right symbol is set. However, the middle symbol is determined based on the determined added value. However, the addition value for the left symbol may be determined using the middle symbol addition value determination table in which the addition value for the left symbol is set, and the middle symbol may be determined based on the determined addition value. In addition, after determining the left symbol in the reach no-miss determination process, the middle symbol is determined based on the value added to the left symbol (the middle symbol is the final stop symbol that stops last), and the determined left symbol or middle symbol is determined. The right symbol may be determined based on the added value for the symbol. In this case, the middle symbol may be the same symbol as the left symbol, but the right symbol does not become the same symbol as the left symbol or the middle symbol. Each symbol (middle symbol, right symbol) is determined using the symbol addition value determination table. Note that the order of determining the symbols and the symbols that serve as the basis for the added value are not limited to the above example, but are arbitrary. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the middle symbol is determined first, the left symbol is determined based on the addition value for the middle symbol, and the right symbol is determined based on the addition value for the middle symbol or the left symbol.

  Note that the “sudden probability change rush fluctuation” and “small hit rush fluctuation” shown in FIG. 15 may be used as “time mission rush fluctuation” indicating that a time mission is entered. Here, the time mission refers to an effect such as a big hit when a mission (command) is presented and the mission is achieved within a predetermined time. The time mission entry variation is a variation that presents the mission and executes a special effect indicating that the mission is entered. When the time mission entry variation is executed, the probability variation symbol or the small hit symbol is suddenly derived and displayed, and then the state is shifted to a state in which the mission presentation effect (the effect in the chance mode) is executed.

  Specifically, after the mission entry fluctuation is executed and the chance item (sudden probability variation symbol or small hit symbol) is derived and displayed, “predetermined outcome (for example,“ 7 ”in the middle of the left display area is specified. The mission (command) of “reach out, the predetermined chances shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, etc.) within the predetermined time” is presented, and when the mission is achieved in the performance during the mission (within the time) When a predetermined outcome is derived and displayed, the player is controlled in a state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit, a transition to a probable change state, or a super-reach).

  Here, at the time of entering the mission, for example, when the mission of “put 7 on the left symbol” is presented and the mission is not achieved, the left symbol selection to which no judgment value is assigned to “7” is selected. The left symbol is determined using the table for use. In addition, when the mission is entered, for example, when a mission of “get 5 reach” is presented, and the mission is not achieved, a reach design with no judgment value assigned to reach design “5” is selected. The reach design is determined using the table.

  In each of the above embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the effect mode is the chance mode by setting / resetting the chance mode flag, and the effect control microcomputer 100 is also configured. Then, by setting / resetting the chance mode flag, it is determined whether or not the effect mode is the chance mode. However, only the production control microcomputer 100 may set / reset the flag during the chance mode to determine whether or not the production mode is the chance mode. In this case, when the production control microcomputer 100 suddenly sets the chance mode flag at the end of the probable big hit or the small hit, the chance mode end condition (for example, when a predetermined number of changes have been completed after entering the chance mode or When a big hit or the like occurs, the chance mode flag is reset.

  In each of the above embodiments, the probability change non-notification effect (common to probability change state / normal game state is common) that does not notify the player whether or not the game state after the end of 15 rounds of jackpot has shifted to the probability change state (or the probability change short state). 15 rounds of productions, or productions common to short-time and short-time conditions; for example, productions that do not know whether or not they are in a certain state without changing the background, etc. You may make it perform after the fluctuation | variation after the end of jackpot is started. When such a probabilistic non-announcement effect is executed, regardless of the probable big hit or non-probable big hit, the big hit symbol is a non-probable variable symbol (or the probabilistic symbol and the non-probable variable symbol are common), and promoted when performing a re-lottery effect. Avoid directing.

  In each of the above embodiments, even if the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed at the end of symbol variation, the lottery effect (for example, the probability variation symbol is re-variable and then the probability variation symbol is stopped again after starting the big hit game) An effect to be displayed or an effect to display the characters “probability change” may be executed. In this case, prior to the re-lottery effect, the player is informed that the winning symbol will be a promising big hit, so the re-lottery effect is not a promotion effect.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are used as the stop symbols of the decorative symbols. However, if the number of symbols is three or more, the number of symbols to be displayed is Any number is acceptable. For example, the display screen of the variable display device 9 is divided into a leftmost display area, a second display area from the left, a third display area from the left, and a rightmost display area. A decorative design may be displayed. In this configuration, the stop symbols of the decorative symbols are the four symbols of the leftmost symbol, the second symbol from the left, the third symbol of the left symbol, and the rightmost symbol. In this case, it may be a big hit when all four symbols are aligned, or may be a big hit if three of the four symbols are aligned. Alternatively, the display screen of the variable display device 9 may be divided into a 3 × 3 matrix display area (decorative symbol display area or square) and the ornamental symbols may be displayed in the respective display areas. In this configuration, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is the symbol in the upper left column, the symbol in the upper middle column, the symbol in the upper right column, the symbol in the middle left column, the symbol in the middle middle row, the symbol in the middle middle row, the symbol in the lower left column Nine symbols, the lower middle row of symbols, and the lower right row of symbols. In this case, to a predetermined effective line (for example, upper line, middle line, lower line, left column line, middle column line, right column line, lower right diagonal line, upper right diagonal line) You may make it a big hit when three specific symbols gather.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine of the above embodiment can be given a predetermined game value to a player mainly when the stop symbol of the special symbol that is variably displayed on the variable display unit based on the start winning prize becomes a predetermined symbol. A pachinko machine that can be given a predetermined gaming value to a player when there is a prize in a predetermined area of an electric game that is released based on a start prize, or a start prize The present invention can be applied even to a pachinko gaming machine in which a predetermined right is generated or continues when a winning is given to a predetermined electric combination that is released when a stop symbol of a variably displayed symbol becomes a predetermined symbol combination. . Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine that inserts game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game, or a game machine that inserts game balls instead of game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game.

  The present invention can be applied to a game such as a pachinko game machine, and can be applied to a game of a gaming machine in which the game state can be controlled to a special game state such as a probability change state.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance eyes A on production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance eyes B on production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance eyes (sudden probability variation symbol, small hit symbol) for sudden probability big hit and small hit. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board | substrate, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution rate of the determination value in a jackpot determination table, and the distribution rate of the determination value in a jackpot classification determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big prize opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process after a special winning opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process after a special winning opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit release pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during small hit release. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration symbol command control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command set process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command transmission process. It is a timing diagram showing the transmission timing of the effect control command when the 15-round jackpot game is executed. It is a timing diagram showing the transmission timing of the effect control command when a two-round big hit game and a small hit game are executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st decoration design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of reach non-losing determination processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the left symbol selection table and the right symbol addition value determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a middle symbol addition value determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a middle symbol addition value determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a middle symbol addition value determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the medium symbol addition value determination table for prohibition patterns. It is explanatory drawing which shows the medium symbol addition value determination table for prohibition patterns. It is explanatory drawing which shows the left symbol selection table and the right symbol addition value determination table at the time of slipping. It is explanatory drawing which shows the left symbol selection table and the right symbol addition value determination table at the time of slipping. It is explanatory drawing which shows the left symbol selection table and the right symbol addition value determination table at the time of slipping. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the symbol determination process before a fluctuation | variation start. It is explanatory drawing which shows the item type selection table when there is no reach (at the time of normal fluctuation). It is explanatory drawing which shows a losing eye determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fluctuation stop symbol determination process at the time of reach no loss. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fluctuation stop symbol determination process at the time of reach no loss. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation stop appearance type selection table at the time of reach-less loss. It is explanatory drawing which shows the right symbol addition value determination table for gasses chance eyes A selection table and gasses chance eyes A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the right symbol addition value determination table for gasses chance eyes B selection table and gasses chance eyes B. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a reach determination loss determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for reach design selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows the output type selection table at the time of reach presence (at the time of a loss reach). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fluctuation stop symbol determination process at the time of reach | attainment loss. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fluctuation stop symbol determination process at the time of reach | attainment loss. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change middle type selection table at the time of reach loss. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change middle type selection table at the time of reach loss. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change middle type selection table at the time of reach loss. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change middle type selection table at the time of reach loss. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change middle type selection table at the time of reach loss. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change middle type selection table at the time of reach loss. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change middle type selection table at the time of reach loss. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change middle type selection table at the time of reach loss. It is explanatory drawing which shows the normal tempering operation | movement selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the normal tempering operation | movement selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the normal tempering operation | movement selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the normal tempering operation | movement selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern selection table for normal use. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol transfer pattern determination table for normal use. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol transfer pattern determination table for normal use. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol transfer pattern determination table for normal use. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol transfer pattern determination table for normal use. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol transfer pattern determination table for normal use. It is explanatory drawing which shows the tempering operation | movement selection table for chance eyes A. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the tempering operation | movement selection table for chance eyes A. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the tempering operation | movement selection table for chance eyes A. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the tempering operation | movement selection table for chance eyes A. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows a chance eye A selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern selection table for chance eyes A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol transfer pattern determination table for chance eyes A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol transfer pattern determination table for chance eyes A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol transfer pattern determination table for chance eyes A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the tempering movement selection table for chance eyes B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the tempering operation | movement selection table for chance eyes B. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the tempering movement selection table for chance eyes B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the tempering operation | movement selection table for chance eyes B. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows a chance eye B selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern selection table for chance eyes B. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol transfer pattern determination table for chance eyes B. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol transfer pattern determination table for chance eyes B. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol transfer pattern determination table for chance eyes B. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st probability variation design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a non-probable variation symbol determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for probability variation symbol selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for non-probable variation design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 8 lotus selection re-lottery selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the re-lottery selection table of 8 frame probability variation system. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 7 lotus type re-lottery selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the re-lottery selection table of 7 frame probability variation system. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 5 lotus type re-lottery selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the re-lottery selection table of a 5-frame probability variation system. It is explanatory drawing which shows the output type selection table at the time of a normal big hit (at the time of a smash hit). It is explanatory drawing which shows the output type selection table at the time of probability variation big hit (at the time of probability variation hit). It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd decoration design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd decoration design determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for relief production at the time of probability change. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for relief production at the time of non-probability change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit time fluctuation stop symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit time fluctuation stop symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit time fluctuation stop symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a temporary determination symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd probability variation design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a timing chart which shows the development timing of reach and relief production. It is a timing chart which shows the change timing in the change pattern with a normal reach. It is a timing chart which shows the variation timing in the variation pattern with super reach (super A or super B). It is a timing chart which shows the change timing in the change pattern with a super reach including a relief effect (super reach A including a relief effect or super reach B including a relief effect). It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a post-round process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a post-round process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the re-lottery effect of the jackpot symbol performed in a variable display apparatus. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of reach-less loss determination processing according to the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a left symbol selection table, a right symbol addition value determination table, and a middle symbol addition value determination table in the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol arrangement of decorative symbols in Embodiment 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement pattern of the reach design in Embodiment 3. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement pattern of jackpot symbols in the third embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing chance eyes A on performance in the third embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing chance eyes B on performance in the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance eyes (sudden probability variation symbol) for sudden probability variation big hit in Embodiment 3. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a chance item for small hits (small hit symbol) in the third embodiment. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of reachless losing determination processing in the third embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a left symbol selection table in the third embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a right symbol addition value determination table in the third embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a chance eye prohibition pattern in the third embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a chance eye prohibition pattern in the third embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a chance eye prohibition table according to the third embodiment. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a medium symbol addition value determination table in the third embodiment. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of reach determination loss determination processing according to the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reach symbol selection table in Embodiment 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reach symbol selection table in Embodiment 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect during the fluctuation | variation of the normal fluctuation | variation in a fluctuation pattern with a super reach, and a normal reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect in the fluctuation | variation of the super reach A (reach 1-1) in the fluctuation pattern with a super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect in the fluctuation | variation of the super reach A (reach 1-2) in the fluctuation pattern with a super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect in the fluctuation | variation of the super reach B (reach 2-1) in the fluctuation pattern with a super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect in the fluctuation | variation of the super reach B (reach 2-2) in the fluctuation pattern with a super reach. FIG. 10 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of a relay board, a sound / lamp control board, and a display control board in a fifth embodiment. 16 is a flowchart showing a main sound / lamp control process executed by the sound / lamp control microcomputer according to the fifth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing sound / lamp side command analysis processing in the fifth embodiment.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Special symbol display 9 Variable display device 14 Start winning opening 15 Variable winning ball device 31 Main board 80 Production control board 80A Sound / lamp control board 80B Display control board 100 Production control microcomputer 100A Sound / lamp control Microcomputer 100B Microcomputer for display control 560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (1)

Provided with a variable display device having a plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified, and for a player when a combination of identification information becomes a specific display result as a display result of variable display A gaming machine that shifts to an advantageous specific gaming state and executes a special effect during variable display of identification information in the variable display device when the combination of identification information results in a special display result as a display result of variable display. And
A game control microcomputer for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect control microcomputer for controlling the display state of the variable display device,
The game control microcomputer is:
Predetermining means for determining whether to shift to the specific gaming state and a variable display pattern of variable display of identification information before derivation display of display results;
A pre-determined command transmitting means for transmitting a pre-determined command capable of specifying the determination result of the pre-determining means,
The production control microcomputer is:
Reach identification information random number for determining reach identification information other than final stop identification information derived and displayed last when it becomes reach and does not shift to the specific gaming state, when it does not reach and does not shift to the specific gaming state A first identification information random number, a second identification information random number for determining first identification information, second identification information, and third identification information constituting a non-specific display result different from the specific display result derived and displayed on Numerical value updating means for updating the numerical value of the third identification information random number;
Numerical value extraction means for extracting the numerical values of the reach identification information random number, the first identification information random number, the second identification information random number and the third identification information random number from the numerical value updating means at a predetermined time;
Identification information determination means for determining a combination of identification information to be derived and displayed as a display result on the plurality of variable display units in the variable display device based on the prior determination command;
Based on the reception of the prior determination command, the variable display device starts variable display of identification information, and is determined by the identification information determination means when a variable display time that can be specified from the variable display pattern has elapsed. Variable display control means for deriving and displaying a combination of identification information obtained,
The variable display control means derives and displays the reach identification information determined by the identification information determination means on the basis of specifying that the reach is a special reach among the reach based on the prior determination command. Later, the final stop identification information that constitutes the specific display result in combination with the reach identification information performs a reach effect that develops to the special reach after passing the configuration position of the specific display result,
The identification information determining means includes
Based on the pre-determined command, determine whether to make the special display result,
When it is determined to be the special display result, a combination of identification information derived and displayed is determined as the special display result,
The reach identification information random number extracted in the reach identification information table in which control data is allocated to the reach identification information when it is determined that the reach is reached and the state is not shifted to the specific gaming state based on the predetermined command. The identification information associated with the control data that matches the numerical value of is determined as the reach identification information, the final stop identification information is determined based on the determined reach identification information and the predetermined command,
When it is specified that the game is not reached and the game state is not shifted to the specific gaming state based on the predetermined command, the first identification information table in which control data is allocated to the first identification information is extracted. The identification information associated with the control data that matches the numerical value of the first identification information random number is determined as the first identification information, and the control data is allocated to the difference between the first identification information and the second identification information. A difference value associated with the control data that matches the numerical value of the second identification information random number extracted in the second identification information table is determined as a difference between the first identification information and the second identification information; 1 to determine the second identification information by the difference between the identification information, the special table combination of the difference in the identity of the first identification information or the second identification information and the third identification information Results and control data so as not have been allocated the third identification information wherein the difference value associated with the control data that matches the value of the extracted third identification information random number in the table the first identification information or the second gaming machine and determines the third identification information by the difference between the identification information 3 determines a difference between the identification information, before Symbol first identification information or the second identification information.

Images